JP2007151967A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing decline of a player's eagerness for the play caused by the situation that the game state is not shifted to a probability variable state. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine has a prescribed profit giving means for giving a prescribed profit to the player, and a specific profit giving means for giving a specific profit, more advantageous than the prescribed profit, to the player. If the result of a lottery is a third result, the prescribed profit giving means is operated to shift the game state to the probability variable state. The game machine has a regular state presentation, a high-probability low-expected presentation suggesting that there is a possibility of generation of the probability variable state, a high-probability highly expected presentation suggesting that the possibility of generation of the probability variable state is high, and a high-probability state presentation suggesting that the probability variable state is generated, as the display modes to appear when the result of the lottery is the third result. The regular state presentation, the high-probability low-expected presentation and the high-probability highly expected presentation may appear also when the result of the lottery is minor winning. Especially in the high-probability low-expected presentation, the shift to the high-probability highly expected presentation is postponed till the number of times of execution of the presentation reaches the number of times of continuous extraction even if the point reaches a certain value. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a revolving type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”), in particular, using a display means, The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays effects related to a lottery such as a variation of a decorative symbol sequence.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a display means is provided on a game board and a decorative symbol sequence composed of decorative symbols such as numbers and symbols is displayed. In this type of gaming machine, a plurality of decorative symbol sequences fluctuate on the display means based on the winning of the game medium at the starting port, and the variation is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result. It has become. That is, the presence / absence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit) is displayed by a combination of decorative symbols that stop on the active line. In addition, in the decorative symbol row, a plurality of normal symbols and a plurality of probability variation symbols (probability variation symbols) are provided as decorative symbols. On the other hand, when a jackpot combination is established by the probability variation symbol, a probability variation jackpot is generated thereafter. In the probability fluctuation big hit, after the big hit state is finished, the probability of the next big hit will be set higher than normal, and the probability of winning at the starting port will be increased more than usual. A game state is generated.

  In recent years, gaming machines equipped with a time-saving function are also known. With this type of gaming machine, after the end of the big hit state, until the decorative symbol sequence fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the variation time of the decorative symbol sequence is shortened and the ease of winning at the start opening is increased more than usual. For example, a short-time gaming state is generated.

Note that these gaming machines are provided with a movable piece that increases the ease of winning a prize at the starting port, and a passage gate through which game media can pass, and the game media passes through the passage gate. When the lottery (normal lottery) is performed and the lottery result is a win, the movable piece is opened for a short time. And in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state, by increasing the probability that the lottery result is a win, that is, the probability that the movable piece will be released, or by increasing the opening time of the movable piece, The ease of winning a prize is increased compared to the normal time.
JP 2005-6742 A Patent 3039765

  However, in the above gaming machines, two types of big hits are set as the big hit state, that is, the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit, and either one is selected based on the lottery result. In the case of a big hit, although it is a big hit, it is not possible to give a big hit, and conversely, there is a concern that it may give a pessimistic feeling that the probability variation was not a big hit. That is, since the normal big hit is a so-called single hit, after the big hit, it must be started again from zero, and it takes time and labor to obtain the next big hit. In other words, after the big hit, the player has no value, so the player's expectation cannot be maintained, and the game is often terminated at that time.

  Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming motivation caused by not being in a probability fluctuation state as much as possible.

Means 1: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause an advantageous gaming state. Equipped,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  Here, examples of the “effect display means” include a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a plasma display device, or a CRT. In addition, as the “opening / closing winning device”, there can be mentioned a big winning opening that is opened at the time of a big hit and from which a game medium can be won.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, at least a start opening is provided in the game area, and when it is detected that a game medium is won in the start opening, a lottery is performed by the lottery means. Moreover, the display mode regarding the lottery is specified based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and the display mode is derived to the effect display unit. A specific display mode will be described later.

By the way, in the lottery means of the present invention, it is possible to generate at least four kinds of advantageous gaming states as “winning”.
The first advantageous gaming state is a so-called “probability variation jackpot”, and occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result. When this hits, a specific profit is first given to the player. Specifically, the opening / closing operation of the open / close winning device is repeated a plurality of times, and the opening time per time in the open state is set to a time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, so that the player A specific benefit. In addition, for the subsequent lottery, at least the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than normal (so-called “probability fluctuation state”). Thereby, the player can obtain a lot of profits, and the expectation for the next big hit is greatly enhanced. In other words, a jackpot ream can be made, and the real thrill of the jackpot can be given to the player. In the probability variation state, in addition to increasing the probability that a specific profit is given, the probability that a predetermined profit is given may be increased.

  The second advantageous gaming state is a so-called “normal jackpot”, and occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result. At this time, a specific profit is given to the player as in the “first advantageous gaming state”. However, for the subsequent lottery, the probability variation state is not entered, and the normal probability (low probability) is obtained.

  The third advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit (a profit less advantageous than the “specific profit”) is given to the player. Specifically, the opening / closing operation of the open / close prize-winning device is performed a smaller number of times than in the case of “specific profit”, and the opening time per time is set to a time that allows several game media to barely win. And limit the profits given to the player. Further, for the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than the normal time (so-called “probability fluctuation state”).

  The fourth advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result. In this win, as in the “third advantageous gaming state”, a predetermined profit is given to the player. However, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated for the subsequent lottery. That is, since the gaming state does not change before and after winning, the player's mood cannot be raised. Therefore, in the following, such “low hit” with low advantage (in other words, “win with no advantageous gaming state”) will be referred to as “small hit” for convenience and referred to as “big hit” with high advantage. I will make a distinction.

  By the way, in the “third advantageous gaming state”, since the probability variation state is given after a predetermined profit is given, if the gaming state is suggested to the player, the expectation for the lottery is greatly increased. It becomes possible to raise the player's mood. However, in this way, if the player is informed that the probability variation state has occurred, the “third advantageous game state” and the “fourth advantageous game state” are clearly distinguished and recognized. In other words, a state in which the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)” in which a probability change state does not newly occur and the highly advantageous “third advantageous gaming state (big hit)” can be visually discriminated. It becomes. For this reason, it is recognized that when the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)” is reached, a predetermined profit with a low advantage is given, but immediately after that, it becomes a value that has no value. Therefore, the expectation for the lottery is lowered, and there is a concern that it may cause irritation. In particular, when the probability of becoming the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)” is very high compared to the probability of becoming the “third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, the “fourth advantageous gaming state” is frequently used. There is a risk that the willingness to play may be impaired due to the dissatisfaction evoked each time, that is, dissatisfaction with not being a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the present invention, the display mode on the effect display means in the case of the third advantageous gaming state and the display mode in the case of the fourth advantageous gaming state cannot be visually distinguished. When the probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation to the player. Specifically, when the lottery result is the third result, that is, as the display mode that can appear when the third advantageous gaming state (big hit), the normal state effect indicating the normal gaming state, and the third High probability expectation small effect indicating that there is a possibility that the probability variation state is generated by the advantageous gaming state control means, and that there is a high possibility that the probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. And a high probability state effect indicating that a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. On the other hand, when the lottery result is the fourth result, that is, as a display mode that can appear when the fourth advantageous game state (small hit), the normal state effect, the high probability expectation small effect, and the high probability expectation large It has directing. That is, in the fourth advantageous gaming state, although the high probability state effect (the effect indicating that the probability variation state has occurred) cannot appear, the other effects appear in the same manner as the third advantageous game state. It is possible.

  In addition, the high probability state effect that appears only in the third advantageous gaming state is an effect that appears after the stage of the high probability expectation small effect and the high probability expectation large effect, and the high probability expectation small effect is high. The transition to the probabilistic expectation production requires the establishment of the first condition, and the transition from the high probability expectation production to the high probability state production requires the establishment of the second condition. Even if the probability variation state occurs, the “high probability state effect” does not appear immediately. In other words, the third advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state cannot be distinguished for a while from when the predetermined profit is given until the “high probability state effect” appears. . For this reason, even if the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, “may be the third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “probability fluctuation state may have entered. It is possible to increase the player's expectation. Therefore, the willingness to play is increased, and the end of the game due to dissatisfaction can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In both advantageous gaming states, as a normal development pattern, the transition from the normal state production to the high probability expectation small production and the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation large production, Expectations can be raised step by step. For this reason, the willingness to game is improved, and it is possible to prevent the game from being ended as much as possible.

  In particular, in the present invention, it is determined that whether or not to shift from the high probability expected small effect to the high probability expected large effect, that is, whether or not the first condition is satisfied is determined as the game progresses. Is based on. That is, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are given, and when the total of the given effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In the present invention, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not immediately shift to the high probability expected large production, but until the high probability expected small production of the set number of continuous derivations is executed, It is designed not to migrate. For this reason, if the total of the production points reaches a certain value in the high-probability expectation small production, or if the high score is obtained even if it does not reach the certain value, “High probability expectation small production to high probability expectation It is possible to recognize that “it has been promised to develop into a large production” or “the development has become almost certain”, and it is possible to increase the willingness to make a transition to a high-probability expected production. That is, it is possible to arouse awareness of “Let's continue playing a little more until the set number of continuous derivations is reached”.

  In the case of the third advantageous gaming state, a high-probability state effect indicating “being in a state of changing probability” will eventually appear, which gives the player a sense of security and draws lottery. It is possible to drastically increase the expectation of the user, that is, the expectation that a specific profit will be given.

Means 2: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by making the opening / closing prize winning device within 2 seconds in total and performing the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing prize winning device at least once;
The opening and closing winning device per opening time is 6 seconds or more, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing winning device is performed more than the number of opening and closing operations when the predetermined profit is given. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to a person,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause an advantageous gaming state. Equipped,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, it is possible to achieve the same operations and effects as the means 1. In particular, in the configuration of the means 2, the time for which the opening / closing prize winning device is opened by the predetermined profit granting means is set to "generally within 2 seconds". This makes it possible to barely win several game media by opening the open / close winning device. In other words, it is possible to give a predetermined profit to the player and limit the profit to a less advantageous than the specific profit. Further, in the configuration of the means 2, the opening time per time when the opening / closing prize winning device is opened by the specific profit granting means is set to “6 seconds or more”. Thus, each time the open / close winning device is opened, a plurality of game media can be awarded with a margin. That is, it is possible to give a specific profit that is highly advantageous to the player.

Means 3: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A launching device for launching a game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle;
An obstacle member disposed in the game area and changing a rolling direction of the game ball;
A start opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game ball;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game ball by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation, and allows the game ball to win by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game balls to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening / closing time of the opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game balls to win in a relaxed manner, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing prize-winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
A payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the start opening or the open / close winning device;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause an advantageous gaming state. Equipped,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, when a game ball is launched from the launching device in response to the operation of the operation handle, the game ball is a game in which a number of obstacle members, a starting port, a special symbol display, and the like are incorporated. Guided to the area. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has won at the start opening, a lottery by a lottery means is performed based on that. When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player occurs.

  The advantageous gaming state is the same as that of the means 1, and “first advantageous gaming state” to “fourth advantageous gaming state” are preset. That is, in the “first advantageous game state”, the opening / closing operation of the open / close prize-winning device is repeated a plurality of times, and the opening time per time in the open state is set to a time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin. By doing so, a specific benefit is given to the player. The probability variation state is set for subsequent lotteries.

  Like the “first advantageous game state”, the “second advantageous game state” gives a specific benefit to the player but does not change the probability variation state.

  In the “third advantageous game state”, the opening / closing operation of the open / close prize-winning device is performed a smaller number of times than in the case of “specific profit”, and the opening time per game is such that several game media can barely win. By setting the time, a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, for the subsequent lottery, the probability variation state is set.

  Like the “third advantageous game state”, the “fourth advantageous game state” gives a predetermined profit to the player, but does not newly generate a probability fluctuation state for the subsequent lottery.

  As described above, in the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, both are given a predetermined profit. However, in the “third advantageous gaming state”, the probability variation state thereafter, and a probability that at least a specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery (ie, “first advantageous gaming state” or “second advantageous gaming state” may occur). The probability variation state is not generated in the “fourth advantageous game state”. Accordingly, the willingness to play is greatly different between the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state”. However, in the present invention, since the same effect is performed by the effect display means, the third advantageous game state and the fourth advantageous effect are given for a while from when the predetermined profit is given until the high probability effect state appears. Even if the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, it is possible to make a guess that "there may be a probability fluctuation state" even if the gaming state cannot be distinguished and recognized. .

  In both advantageous gaming states, as a normal development pattern, the transition from the normal state production to the high probability expectation small production and the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation large production, Expectations can be raised step by step. For this reason, the willingness to game is improved, and it is possible to prevent the game from being ended as much as possible.

  In particular, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are assigned, and when the total of the assigned effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In addition, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not shift until all the high-probability expected small productions for the set number of continuous derivations have been executed. If the value is reached, or if a high score is reached even if the value does not reach a certain value, it is "promised to develop from a high-probability expectation small production to a high-probability expectation production" or " Can be recognized, and as a result, awareness can be raised that “let's continue playing a little more until the set number of continuous derivations is reached”.

  Means 4: In any one of the constitutions of means 1 to 3, “the derivation number setting means includes a variable number of times means for changing the continuous derivation number of the high-probability expected small effect based on the gaming state”. It is characterized by.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, since the number of continuous derivations of the high-probability expected small effects changes based on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to predict the number of continuous derivations, and the total of the production points is a constant value within the period. It can be even more irritating as to whether or not For example, even if the number of predicted high-probability small performances was performed, the total of the production points did not reach a certain value. On the contrary, the total of the production points gradually increases, and when it is certain that the next high probability expectation production will reach a certain value, the production will end at that time.

Means 5: In the configuration of means 4, "when the lottery result is the fourth result, the display control means can perform the normal state from the high probability expected small effect without developing more than the high probability expected small effect. Route determination that determines either the first route to return to the production or the second route to develop to the high probability expectation large production and then return to the normal state production before moving to the high probability expectation small production Further comprising means,
The number of times variable means is:
Derivation frequency distribution table showing the relationship between the route determined by the route determination means and the distribution of the continuous derivation frequency, and the second route is set so that the continuous derivation frequency is larger than the first route. When,
Random number extracting means for determining the number of times for extracting the random number for determining the number of times for determining the number of times of continuous derivation;
When the number determination random number extraction means extracts the number determination random number, the number determination means for determining the number of continuous derivations based on the number determination random number, the determined route, and the number distribution table; It is characterized by having.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, when the lottery result is the fourth result, either the first route or the second route is determined by lottery before shifting to the high-probability expected small effect. The first route is a route that returns from the high probability expectation small effect to the normal state effect, and the second route is a route that transitions from the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation effect and then returns to the normal state effect. Then, in determining the number of times of continuous derivation, first, a random number for frequency determination is extracted, and based on the random number for frequency determination, the determined route (first route or second route), and the frequency distribution table, The number of continuous derivations is determined. That is, the number of continuous derivations is determined based on the distribution corresponding to the route. In particular, in the frequency allocation table, the second route is set to have a higher number of continuous derivations than the first route, so the number of high-probability expected small productions is a pattern that develops into a high-probability expected large production. Will be more. Therefore, when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production, the feeling of expectation can be gradually increased by the high-probability expectation production, which is in the middle of the production, and the mood when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production can be raised. On the other hand, if it does not shift to the high-probability expectation production, the high-probability expectation production is terminated at a relatively early stage, thereby suppressing a decrease in the willingness to have not developed into a high-probability expectation production. can do.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5, “The point giving means is:
A point distribution table showing the relationship between the total of the production points and the distribution (appearance rate) of the production point values to be given,
Random number extraction means for point determination for extracting random numbers for determination of granted points before shifting to the high-expected expectation small effect,
When the point determination random number extraction means extracts the assigned point determination random number, an effect point value is determined based on the assigned point determination random number, the total of the stored effect points, and the point distribution table. Point determination means ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, when the point determination random number extraction means extracts the grant point determination random number, the total of the production points already stored at the time of the lottery, the extracted grant point determination random number, The production point value corresponding to the total of production points is determined from the point distribution table. For this reason, it becomes possible to generate an unspecified effect point based on a random number, and attention to the effect point is further increased, and it is possible to add a sharpness when providing the effect point. In addition, since the tendency of the effect point value to be granted changes depending on the total of effect points that have already been stored, for example, the effect point value to be granted may be limited so that the total of effect points does not exceed a predetermined value. , It becomes possible to cause a bias in the way the production points are accumulated.

  Means 7: The constitution of means 6 is characterized in that “the point distribution table is distributed such that the larger the total of the effect points is, the more difficult it is to assign a large effect point value”.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the higher the total of the produced performance points is, the more difficult it is to give a large performance point value, so that the total of the production points can be prevented from reaching a certain value immediately. it can. That is, the pleasure of collecting the production points can be continued for a relatively long time. On the contrary, when the total of the production points is low, it is possible to give a relatively large production point value. For example, if a large performance point value is given at the beginning of the game, it becomes possible to attract the player's consciousness.

  Means 8: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 7, “In the case of returning from the high-probability expected small effect to the normal state effect, further comprising point erasing means for erasing or reducing the stored effect points” It is characterized by that.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, when the high-probability expected large production does not appear, the total of the production points will return from the high-probability expected small production to the normal state production without reaching a certain value. The stored production points are deleted or reduced. Therefore, the production of the normal state is started again from the state where the total of the production points is zero or very small. For example, even if the fourth hit occurs continuously, the total of the production points to be accumulated becomes extremely large. Can be prevented.

Means 9: In the constitution of means 8, “the point erasing means indicates the relationship between the total of the stored effect points and the ratio of a part of the stored effect points that remains after erasure. The remaining point distribution table set so that the higher the total, the higher the remaining ratio,
A remaining point determination random number extraction means for extracting a remaining point determination random number for determining whether or not a part of the effect point is left;
When the remaining point determination random number is extracted by the remaining point determination random number extraction means, the effect at the time of erasure is based on the remaining point determination random number, the total of the stored effect points, and the remaining point distribution table. A remaining point determining means for determining whether or not a part of the point is left,
When the remaining point determining means determines that the effect points are left, the total is resumed from the remaining effect points ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the larger the total of the production points accumulated up to the time of judgment, the easier it is to leave a part, and if left, it is left after returning to the normal state production. The total is resumed from the production points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a decrease in expectation when returning from the high-probability expected small effect to the normal state effect, and to suppress the game from being ended at that time.

  Means 10: In any one of the constitutions of means 1 to 9, "if it is decided to shift to the high probability expected large effect, the high probability expected large effect in the final high probability expected small effect It further comprises a transition destination notice display means for displaying a notice to the effect of transition to "."

  According to the configuration of the means 10, in the case of shifting to the high probability expectation large effect, a notice display indicating the transition destination is performed in the final high probability expectation small effect. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize that the high-probability expected small effect has ended and that the transition destination is the high-probability expected large effect. Therefore, a series of performances can be performed smoothly, and the expectation can be greatly expanded with respect to the transition to the high-probability expectation production.

Means 11: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 10, “The point giving means can give the effect point even in the normal state effect,
The total of the effect points given in the normal state effect is added to the total of the effect points stored in the high-probability expected small effect ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the presentation points may be given not only in the high-probability expected small production but also in the normal state production. Therefore, the pleasure of acquiring the privilege in the normal state effect increases, and the willingness to shift to the high probability expectation small effect can be further enhanced by associating the normal state effect with the high probability expectation small effect. In other words, in the normal state performance, when a performance point that satisfies a certain value is given, “It was promised to develop from a high probability expectation small production to a high probability expectation large production” or “ Can be recognized.

Means 12: “An effect display means for displaying an effect accompanying the game;
A first special symbol indicator for displaying the first special symbol;
A second special symbol indicator for displaying a second special symbol;
A first start port that is arranged in the game area and in which a game medium can be won;
First winning state detecting means for detecting that the game medium has won at the first starting port;
First lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game medium by the first winning state detecting means;
First display mode determining means for determining a stop symbol of the first special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means;
The first special symbol is varied based on the detection of the game medium by the first winning state detecting means, and the variation of the first special symbol is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the first display mode determining means. First special symbol variation control means;
A second start port arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game medium;
Gaming state determination means for determining whether or not a specific gaming state;
A winning rate changing means for increasing the frequency of changing the second starting port to a state in which a winning of the game medium is possible when it is determined by the gaming state determining means that the game state has been reached;
Second winning state detecting means for detecting that the gaming medium has won a prize at the second starting port;
Second lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game medium by the second winning state detecting means;
Second display mode determination means for determining a stop symbol of the second special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means;
The second special symbol is changed based on the detection of the game medium by the second winning state detection means, and the change of the second special symbol is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the second display mode determination means. A second special symbol variation control means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the first lottery unit or the second lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and at least the specific profit is obtained in the subsequent lottery. Change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is set in a probability fluctuation state in which the probability to be given is set higher than normal and fluctuates in the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator First advantageous gaming state control for giving an advantageous gaming state for a short gaming state in which the time is set to be relatively shorter than usual and the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port is increased more than usual. Means,
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability variation state is not generated. A second advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is maintained until at least the number of changes in the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number;
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result, the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and the gaming state at the time of the lottery is at least A third advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state that generates the probability varying state but not the short-time gaming state when not in the probability varying state and the short-time gaming state;
When the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means grants the predetermined profit to the player, but the advantageous gaming state does not occur. Four advantageous gaming state control means,
Comprising
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode specific to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  Here, as the “specific game state”, a so-called probability variation game state or a short-time game state can be exemplified, but even in other game states, if the game state is advantageous for the player, It can be applied as a specific gaming state.

  According to the structure of the means 12, at least the first start port and the second start port are provided in the game area, and when it is detected that the game medium has won the first start port, A lottery is performed by the first lottery means. In addition, when it is detected that a game medium has been won at the second starting port, a lottery is performed by the second lottery means based on the winning. On the other hand, there is provided a special symbol display for variably displaying the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result, and the first special symbol variation control means varies the first special symbol in the first special symbol display, Stop at the first special symbol determined based on the lottery result of one lottery means. Similarly, the second special symbol variation control means varies the second special symbol on the second special symbol display and stops at the second special symbol determined based on the lottery result of the second lottery means. . In other words, if a game medium wins at one of the start openings, the special symbol corresponding to that start opening fluctuates, and if a game medium wins at both start openings, two special symbols fluctuate. To do.

  In the present invention, when the gaming state determination means determines that a specific gaming state has been reached, the frequency at which the second starting port is changed to a state in which a gaming medium can be won is increased. In other words, since it is extremely difficult to win game media at the second starting port during normal times, a lottery is performed mainly based on winning at the first starting port and a display related to one type of lottery. The mode is often derived to the display means. On the other hand, when a specific gaming state is reached, it is possible to easily win game media for the second starting port. For this reason, the opportunity that the lottery by the 1st lottery means and the lottery by the 2nd lottery means are performed increases, and the advantage in a specific gaming state improves.

In the present invention, it is possible to alternatively generate at least four types of advantageous gaming states as “winning”.
The first advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the first result. When this hits, a specific profit is first given to the player. Further, for each subsequent lottery, a probability that a specific profit is given is set to be higher than usual (a so-called “probability fluctuation state”). In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that fluctuate on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator is shortened and the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port is increased more than usual. (So-called “time-saving gaming state”).

  The second advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the second result. At this time, a specific profit is given to the player as in the “first advantageous gaming state”. However, for the subsequent lottery, the probability does not change and the normal probability (low probability) is obtained, so it is difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation. However, in the “second advantageous gaming state”, after a specific profit is given, the short-time gaming state is entered until the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes becomes a predetermined number.

  The third advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, for the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than the normal time (so-called “probability fluctuation state”).

  The fourth advantageous gaming state occurs when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the fourth result. In this win, as in the “third advantageous gaming state”, a predetermined profit is given to the player. However, for the subsequent lottery, neither a probability variation state nor a short-time gaming state is newly generated.

  In the third advantageous gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated, and for the effect display means, the same effects as in the fourth advantageous gaming state (normal state effect, high probability expectation small effect, and Since a high-probability expected production) can appear, it cannot be visually distinguished compared to the “fourth advantageous game state”. In other words, even when the “fourth advantageous gaming state” occurs, it can be assumed that “the third advantageous gaming state may be present”, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. .

  Further, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are given, and when the total of the given effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In addition, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not shift until all the high-probability expected small productions for the set number of continuous derivations have been executed. If the value is reached, or if a high score is reached even if the value does not reach a certain value, it is "promised to develop from a high-probability expectation small production to a high-probability expectation production" or " Can be recognized, and as a result, awareness can be raised that “let's continue playing a little more until the set number of continuous derivations is reached”.

Means 13: “A special symbol indicator on which a special symbol is displayed;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of the game medium by the winning state detecting means;
Display mode determination means for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
Special symbol variation control means for varying the special symbol based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detecting means and stopping the variation of the special symbol at the stop symbol determined by the display mode determining means;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. The probability variation state is set to a higher value, and the variation time of the special symbol that varies on the special symbol display is relatively shorter than usual, and the ease of winning a prize at the start port is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state to be a short gaming state when increased;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and at least the number of changes in the special symbol is not generated without causing the probability fluctuation state. Second advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is reached until a predetermined number of times;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the predetermined profit granting means grants the predetermined profit to the player, and the gaming state at the time of the lottery is not at least the probability variation state and the time reduction Third advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state that does not become the short-time gaming state while generating the probability variation state when it is not a gaming state;
And when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause the advantageous gaming state to occur. A main board having
An effect display means for displaying an effect associated with the game;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
Decorative design variation control means for causing the effect display means to change the decorative design and stopping the decorative design at a predetermined design based on the lottery result,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result or the second result, after displaying the decorative symbol related to the lottery result, a hit display means for displaying "winning",
And when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result or the fourth result, it comprises a peripheral board having a winning state implicit means for making it unclear to the player which is the hit,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode specific to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the content of the control is shared between the main board and the peripheral board, and the main board performs a predetermined lottery based on the gaming state, and also changes the special symbol on the special symbol display. Based on the result, a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol is executed. Further, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, any one of “first advantageous gaming state”, “second advantageous gaming state”, “third advantageous gaming state”, and “fourth advantageous gaming state” It makes it possible to make a hit. In the “first advantageous gaming state” or “second advantageous gaming state”, a specific profit is given to the player, and in the “third advantageous gaming state” or the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, there is an advantage over the specific profit. Give a certain low profit. Further, in the “first advantageous gaming state” and the “third advantageous gaming state”, the gaming state is set to a probability variation state, and the probability that a specific profit is given next time is set higher than usual. However, when the “third advantageous game state” is generated when the probability variation state is not the short-time game state, the short-time game state such as the “first advantageous game state” is not generated. That is, the state is visually indistinguishable compared to the case of the “fourth advantageous game state (small hit)”.

  On the other hand, on the peripheral board, the decorative symbol is changed on the effect display means, and the decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined symbol based on the lottery result. In the case of the “first advantageous game state” or the “second advantageous game state”, the decorative symbol relating to the lottery result is displayed, and then “winning” is derived to the effect display means. On the other hand, in the case of the “third advantageous gaming state” or the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, it is unclear to the player which player is hit. That is, as the effects that can appear on the effect display means, there are a plurality of effects (normal state effects, high-probability expected small effects, and high-probability expected large effects), and one effect is derived from them. . Therefore, when a specific profit is granted, the indication of “hit” makes it easy to recognize the type of hit, while when a given profit is granted, which win It is possible to suppress the decrease in the willingness to play due to the “fourth advantageous gaming state”.

  Further, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are given, and when the total of the given effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In addition, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not shift until all the high-probability expected small productions for the set number of continuous derivations have been executed. When the value is reached, it can be recognized that “the development from the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation big production has been promised” or “the development is almost certain”. It is possible to arouse awareness of “Let's continue playing a little more until the set number of continuous derivations is reached”.

  In addition, it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects without increasing the burden on the main board by causing the peripheral board to perform the decorative pattern variation control and the determination of whether or not the lottery means.

Means 14: “Special symbol display on which special symbols are displayed;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
A winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the winning state detecting means;
A winning symbol random number extracting means for extracting a winning symbol random number based on the winning state detected by the winning state detector;
Fluctuation time random number for extracting the variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used for determining the special symbol variation display pattern (variation time) based on the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number Extraction means,
A hit determination table showing the relationship between the extracted random number for hit determination and the success / failure of the hit,
A winning symbol table showing a relationship between the extracted random number for winning symbol and the variable stopping symbol which is variable and stopped as a lottery result in the special symbol indicator,
A table for setting a variation time for hitting which shows a relationship between the random number for variation time to be extracted and used and the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display;
Outgoing variation time setting table that shows the relationship between the variation time random number that is used and extracted and the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display,
When the hit determination random number is extracted, a hit determination means for determining whether or not a hit is determined from the hit determination random number and the hit determination table;
When the winning symbol random number is extracted, stop symbol determining means for determining a variable stopping symbol in the special symbol indicator from the corresponding symbol random number and the symbol symbol for winning symbol,
When the variation time random number is extracted and determined to be a hit by the success / failure determination means, the variation time of the special symbol is determined from the variation time random number and the hit variation time setting table. On the other hand, if the random time for variation time is extracted and it is determined that the variation determination means is out of place, the variation time of the special symbol is determined from the variation time random number and the out-of-range variation time setting table. To determine the variable time determining means,
In accordance with detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means, the special symbol display starts to change the special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the variation time determination means has elapsed, the stop symbol determination means Special symbol variation control means for halting variation at the determined variation suspension symbol;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of
When it is determined that the first hit is determined by the success / failure determination means, the probability that the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means and at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery The probability variation state is set higher than normal, and the variation time of the special symbol that is varied by the special symbol indicator is relatively shorter than normal, and the winning at the start opening is easy. First advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state to be a short gaming state when increasing
When it is determined that the second winning is determined by the success / failure determining means, the specific profit is provided to the player by the specific profit giving means, and at least the special symbol is generated without generating the probability variation state. Second advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is kept until the number of times of fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times,
When it is determined that the third win is determined by the success / failure determination means, the predetermined profit is provided to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and the gaming state at the time of the lottery is at least in the probability variation state A third advantageous gaming state control means for giving an advantageous gaming state that does not become the short-time gaming state, although the probability variation state is generated when it is not in the short-time gaming state;
A fourth advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous gaming state does not occur even though the predetermined profit granting means grants the predetermined profit to the player when it is determined that the fourth hit is determined by the success / failure determination means. Control means,
And a main control means having a command transmission means for transmitting a control command including a change display command corresponding to a variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, at least whether or not each hit is present,
Effect display means for displaying decorative designs,
Decorative design variation control means for causing the effect display means to change the decorative design, receiving a control command transmitted from the main control means, and stopping the decorative design at a predetermined design based on the control command;
A display control unit that specifies a display mode related to the lottery based on the control command and derives the display mode to the effect display unit,
When it is determined that the first hit or the second hit is determined by the success / failure determination means, a hit display means for displaying "hit" after displaying a decorative design,
And a sub-control means having a winning state implied means for making the player uncertain which is the winning position when it is determined by the winning / decision determining means to be the third hit or the fourth hit. And
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result by the success / failure determination means is the third hit or the fourth hit,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode specific to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result by the success / failure determination means is the third hit and not the fourth hit,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, the main control means extracts the winning determination random number and the winning symbol random number based on the gaming state detected by the winning state detecting means, respectively, and further changes the variation time based on these random numbers. Extract random numbers. Thereafter, whether or not to win is determined from the hit determination random number and the hit determination table. Further, the fluctuation stop symbol in the special symbol display is determined from the random symbol for winning symbol and the table for winning symbol. Furthermore, when it is determined that it is a winning, the changing time of the special symbol is determined from the random number for changing time and the table for setting the changing time per hit, while when it is determined that it is out of place. The variation time of the special symbol is determined from the variation time random number and the out-of-range variation time setting table. Then, the special symbol display is started to change the special symbol, and after the variation time determined using the variable time variable table has elapsed, the variation is stopped using the variable stop symbol determined using the winning symbol table.

  Also, if it is determined that the game is a win, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. Specifically, any one of “first advantageous gaming state”, “second advantageous gaming state”, “third advantageous gaming state”, and “fourth advantageous gaming state” based on a random number for hit determination. One advantageous gaming state is identified and executed. In addition, since the process in each advantageous game state is the same as that of the structure of the means 13, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  By the way, the main control means transmits a control command including at least a win / fail command regarding the presence / absence of hitting and a change display command corresponding to the change mode of the special symbol when the change of the special symbol is started. Then, the sub-control means receives these control commands and performs processing according to the control commands. That is, the sub-control unit recognizes the lottery result of the lottery unit based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit, and stops the decorative symbol at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result.

  In the case of the “first advantageous game state” or the “second advantageous game state”, the decorative symbol relating to the lottery result is displayed, and then “winning” is derived to the effect display means. On the other hand, in the case of the “third advantageous gaming state” or the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, it is unclear to the player which player is hit. That is, as the effects that can appear in the effect display means, a plurality of effects (normal state effect, high probability expectation small effect, and high probability expectation large effect) having the same content are provided, and one effect is derived therefrom.

  Further, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are given, and when the total of the given effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In addition, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not shift until all the high-probability expected small productions of the set number of continuous derivations are executed. , It can be recognized that "the development from a high probability expectation small production to a high probability expectation large production has been promised" or "the development has become almost certain". It is possible to evoke the awareness that “Let's continue playing a little more until the number of continuation derivations is reached”.

  In addition, according to this structure, it becomes possible to process complicated control comparatively easily by using a some table.

Means 15: “A first special symbol display on which a first special symbol is displayed;
A second special symbol indicator for displaying a second special symbol;
A first start port that is arranged in the game area and in which a game medium can always win,
A second start port in which a game medium can be won when placed in the game area and opened;
First winning state detection means for detecting that a game medium has won a prize at the first start opening;
Second winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has won a prize at the second starting port;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
Gaming state determination means for determining whether or not a specific gaming state;
A winning rate changing means for increasing the frequency of changing the second start port to a state in which the gaming medium can be won, when it is determined by the gaming state determining means that the game state has been reached;
First winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a first winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detection means;
A second winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a second winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the second winning state detection means;
A first winning design random number extraction means for extracting a first winning design random number based on the winning status detected by the first winning status detection means;
A second winning design random number extraction means for extracting a second winning design random number based on the winning status detected by the second winning status detection means;
The first variation display pattern random number (first variation time random number) used for determining the variation display pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is used for the first hit determination random number and the first hit symbol Random number extraction means for first variation time to extract based on random numbers,
The second variation display pattern random number (second variation time random number) used for determining the variation display pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is used as the second hit determination random number and the second hit symbol. A random number extracting means for second variation time extracting based on a random number;
A first hit determination table showing a relationship between the extracted first hit determination random number and the winning / failing of winning,
A second hit determination table showing a relationship between the extracted second hit determination random number and whether or not a win is won,
A first winning symbol table showing a relationship between the extracted random number for the first winning symbol and the first variation stop symbol that is fluctuated and stopped as a lottery result in the first special symbol indicator;
A second winning symbol table showing a relationship between the extracted random number for the second winning symbol and the second variable stop symbol that is changed and stopped as a lottery result in the second special symbol indicator;
A first hit time variation time setting table that indicates the relationship between the first variation time random number to be extracted and the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display used in the case of the hit;
A second hit time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the second variation time random number to be extracted and extracted and the second special symbol variation time in the second special symbol display;
A first off-time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the first variation time random number to be extracted and extracted and the first special symbol variation time on the first special symbol display;
A second off-time variation time setting table showing a relationship between the second variation time random number to be extracted and the variation time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display;
When the first hit determination random number is extracted, first hit determination means for determining whether or not a hit is determined from the first hit determination random number and the first hit determination table;
When the second hit determination random number is extracted, second hit determination means for determining whether or not a hit is determined from the second hit determination random number and the second hit determination table;
When the first per symbol random number is extracted, the first stop symbol for determining the first variation stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator from the first per symbol random number and the first per symbol symbol table Decision means,
When the second per symbol random number is extracted, a second stop symbol for determining a second variation stop symbol in the second special symbol indicator from the second per symbol random number and the second per symbol table Decision means,
When the first variation time random number is extracted and determined to be a hit by the first success / failure determining means, the first variation time random number and the first variation time variation time setting table When determining the variation time of the first special symbol, on the other hand, when the first variation time random number is extracted and determined to be out of place by the first hit / fail determination means, the first variation time random number and First variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the first special symbol from the first out-of-range variation time setting table;
When the second variation time random number is extracted and determined to be a hit by the second success / failure determination means, the second variation time random number and the second variation time variation time setting table When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, on the other hand, when the second variation time random number is extracted and determined to be out by the second success / failure determination means, the second variation time random number and Second variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the second special symbol from the second out-of-range variation time setting table;
The first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display in accordance with the detection order of the game media by the first winning status detection means and the second winning status detection means. Is determined by the first stop symbol determination unit or the second stop symbol determination unit after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination unit or the second variation time determination unit elapses. Special symbol variation control means for varying and stopping the first variation stop symbol or the second variation stop symbol;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of
When it is determined that the first hit is determined by the first hit / fail determination means or the second hit / fail determination means, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit giving means, and at least in the subsequent lottery The probability that the specific profit is given is set to a probability fluctuation state that is set higher than normal, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol that fluctuates in the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. (2) The advantageous game state that gives a short game state when the variation time of the special symbol is made relatively shorter than normal time and the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port is increased more than usual is provided. One advantageous gaming state control means,
When it is determined by the first winning / failing determining means or the second winning / failing determining means that the second winning is, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit giving means, and the probability variation state is set. A second advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state in which the short-time gaming state is maintained until at least the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times without being generated;
When it is determined by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means that the third win is achieved, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit and at the time of the lottery. A third advantageous gaming state control means for providing an advantageous gaming state that generates the probability varying state but not the short-time gaming state when the gaming state is not at least the probability varying state and not the short-time gaming state;
When it is determined that the first win / loss determination means or the second win / fail determination means is the fourth hit, the predetermined profit giving means gives the predetermined profit to the player, but an advantageous gaming state occurs. Fourth advantageous gaming state control means,
And a main control having command sending means for sending a control command including at least a success / failure command relating to the presence / absence of each hit and a change display command corresponding to a change mode (change time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Means,
Production display means for displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol,
A first decorative design that causes the effect display means to change the first decorative design, receives a control command transmitted from the main control device, and stops the first decorative design at a predetermined design based on the control command. Variation control means,
A second decorative design that causes the effect display means to change the second decorative design, receives a control command transmitted from the main control device, and stops the second decorative design at a predetermined design based on the control command. Variation control means,
A display control unit that specifies a display mode related to the lottery based on the control command and derives the display mode to the effect display unit,
When the determination result of either the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination, which can be performed sequentially or in parallel, is the first hit or the second hit, a decoration symbol related to the hit / failure determination means is displayed. A hit display means for displaying "winning" after
In addition, when the judgment result of either the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination that can be performed sequentially or in parallel is the third hit or the fourth hit, it is determined which game is hit. A sub-control means having a winning state apocalyptic means to make the person unclear
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means is the third hit or the fourth hit,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
An effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability fluctuation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation large performance indicating that there is a high possibility;
As the display mode peculiar to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means or the second success / failure determination means is the third hit and not the fourth hit,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

  According to the configuration of the means 15, the main control means extracts the first winning determination random number and the first winning design random number based on the gaming state detected by the first winning state detecting means, respectively, Extract random numbers for first variation time based on random numbers. Thereafter, whether or not to win is determined from the first hit determination random number and the first hit determination table. Further, the first variation stop symbol in the first special symbol display is determined from the first hit symbol random number and the first hit symbol table. Furthermore, when it is determined that the winning is, the changing time of the first special symbol is determined from the first changing time random number and the first changing time setting table, and on the other hand, it may be out of place. If determined, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from the first variation time random number and the first deviation variation time setting table. Then, the first special symbol display starts the variation of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of the variation time determined using the first variation time variable table, the first symbol determined using the first hit symbol table is used. Fluctuate and stop with one variable stop symbol.

  Similarly, the main control means extracts the second winning determination random number and the second winning design random number based on the gaming state detected by the second winning state detection means, and based on these random numbers. Extract random numbers for second variation time. Thereafter, whether or not to win is determined from the second hit determination random number and the second hit determination table. Further, the second variation stop symbol in the second special symbol display is determined from the second per symbol random number and the second per symbol table. Furthermore, when it is determined that the winning is, the changing time of the second special symbol is determined from the second changing time random number and the second hitting time changing time setting table, and on the other hand, it may be out of place. If it is determined, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from the second variation time random number and the second variation time variation time setting table. Then, the second special symbol display starts the variation of the second special symbol, and after the lapse of the variation time determined using the second variation time variable table, the second special symbol display is determined using the second hit symbol table. Fluctuate and stop with the double-variable stop symbol

  Further, the main control means is configured to increase the frequency of changing the second start port to a state in which a game medium can be won when the gaming state becomes a specific gaming state. For this reason, in normal times, lottery will be performed based on the winning at the first starting opening, and the first special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner. It becomes easy to win, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is often performed in order.

  Also, if it is determined that the game is a win, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated after the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. Specifically, based on the first winning determination random number or the second winning determination random number, “first advantageous gaming state”, “second advantageous gaming state”, “third advantageous gaming state”, and “fourth Any one of the advantageous game states is identified and executed. Note that the processing in each advantageous gaming state is the same as the configuration of the means 12, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  By the way, in the main control means, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, at least a winning / missing command relating to the presence / absence of winning in both lottery means and a fluctuation display command corresponding to the fluctuation mode of these special symbols are included. Send a control command. Then, the sub-control means receives these control commands and performs processing according to the control commands. That is, the sub control means recognizes the lottery results of the first lottery means and the second lottery means by the control command transmitted from the main control means, and based on those lottery results, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are recognized. Stop at a predetermined stop pattern.

  In the case of the “first advantageous game state” or the “second advantageous game state”, the decorative symbol relating to the lottery result is displayed, and then “winning” is derived to the effect display means. On the other hand, in the case of the “third advantageous gaming state” or the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, it is unclear to the player which player is hit. That is, as the effects that can appear in the effect display means, a plurality of effects (normal state effect, high probability expectation small effect, and high probability expectation large effect) having the same content are provided, and one effect is derived therefrom.

  Further, in the high-probability expected small effect, predetermined effect points are given, and when the total of the given effect points reaches a certain value, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not an effect point is given while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect. In addition, even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not shift until all the high-probability expected small productions of the set number of continuous derivations are executed. , It can be recognized that "the development from a high probability expectation small production to a high probability expectation large production has been promised" or "the development has become almost certain". It is possible to evoke the awareness that “Let's continue playing a little more until the number of continuation derivations is reached”.

  In addition, it has any one structure of means 1 to means 15 and "the first special symbol display on which at least the first special symbol is displayed and the second on which the second special symbol is displayed. "With a special symbol indicator, and changing the first special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port, and changing the second special symbol based on the winning to the second starting port" The following configurations (configurations of means 16 to 20) can be adopted.

  Means 16: “The first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed in accordance with the detection order of the game medium by the first winning state detecting unit and the second winning state detecting unit, and the first display mode determining unit Or, it further comprises special symbol fluctuation control means for stopping fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the stop symbol determined by the second display mode determining means.

  According to the configuration of the means 16, since the two types of special symbols change sequentially according to the winning order of the game media, it is possible to prevent the two lotteries from being performed in parallel, and thus the big hit state is overlapped and executed. It is possible to prevent the production contents from becoming complicated and the unnaturalness of the game.

Means 17: In the constitution of means 16, "if the game medium is detected by the first winning state detection means during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first number is set to a certain number of times as an upper limit. A first holding / digesting means for storing the starting memory number and causing the first special symbol to be changed by the stored first starting memory number;
When the game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second start memory number is stored up to a certain number of times, and the first It further comprises a second holding / digesting means that allows the two special symbols to be changed by the number of the stored second start memory numbers ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 17, the holding / digesting process is performed for both the first lottery means and the second lottery means, and the first winning state is detected during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the game medium is detected by the means, the first start memory number is stored up to a predetermined number of times, and the first display mode is derived by the stored first start memory number. In addition, when a game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second start memory number is stored up to a certain number of times and the second start memory number is stored. Derivation of the display mode is sequentially performed by the number of stored second start memory numbers. In particular, since the variation of the two types of special symbols is sequentially derived according to the winning order of the game media, even if there is a difference in the ease of winning for the two starting points, the proportion according to the ease of winning For example, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of effects due to the fact that only one start memory number is left and a corresponding display mode is continuously derived.

Means 18: In the configuration of means 17, “the first lottery means extracts a first winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detecting means. Having means,
The second lottery means has a second winning determination random number extracting means for extracting a second winning determination random number based on the winning state detected by the second winning state detection means,
The first display mode determining means has first winning symbol random number extracting means for extracting a first winning symbol random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detector.
The second display mode determining means has second winning design random number extraction means for extracting a second winning design random number based on the winning status detected by the second winning status detection means,
Random number storage means capable of storing the extracted first random number for determination, second random number for determination, first random number for symbol, and second random number for symbol, Random number storage means comprising m storage areas respectively associated with the value of the total start memory number (“1” to “m”), which is the sum of the first start memory number and the second start memory number Further comprising
The first holding / digestion means is:
When the game medium is detected by the first winning state detection means during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first starting memory number has not reached the upper limit, The value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the first hit determination random number and the first hit design random number are extracted. The extracted random numbers and these random numbers are the first lottery means. A first holding control means for storing a determination flag indicating that the random number is a random number in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total starting storage number;
If the total starting memory number is not “0” after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the total starting memory number “1” is used. In addition, it is determined whether or not the random number stored in the storage area is a random number related to the first lottery means, and if it is a random number related to the first lottery means, the total starting storage number “1” corresponds The first hit determination random number and the first hit design random number are read from the storage area, the first start storage number is decreased by “1”, and each random number value stored in each storage area n And a first digestion control means for shifting the discrimination flag to n-1 storage areas,
The second holding / digestion means is:
When the game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the second starting memory number has not reached the upper limit, The value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the second hit determination random number and the second hit design random number are extracted. The extracted random numbers and these random numbers are the second lottery means. A second holding control means for storing a determination flag indicating that the random number is a random number in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total starting storage number;
If the total starting memory number is not “0” after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the total starting memory number “1” is used. In addition, it is determined whether or not the random number stored in the storage area is a random number related to the second lottery means, and if it is a random number related to the second lottery means, the total starting storage number “1” corresponds The random number for determination of the second hit and the random number for symbol of second hit are read from the storage area, the value of the second starting storage number is decreased by “1”, and each random value stored in each storage area n And a second digestion control means for shifting the discrimination flag to an n-1 storage area.

  According to the configuration of the means 18, the first lottery means extracts the first winning determination random number based on the winning state at the first starting port, and determines whether the first winning lottery is successful based on the random value. . Similarly, the second lottery means extracts a second determination random number based on the winning state at the second starting port, and determines whether or not the second winning lottery is successful based on the random value. On the other hand, the first display mode determining means extracts the first winning design random number based on the winning state detected by the first winning state detecting means, and based on this random number value, whether or not the first winning lottery is determined. The stop symbol corresponding to the result is determined. Similarly, the second display mode determining means extracts a second winning design random number based on the winning state detected by the second winning state detecting means, and based on the random number value, the second winning lottery The stop symbol corresponding to the result of the success or failure is determined.

  By the way, when a game medium wins at the first starting port or the second starting port, a random number for determination and a random number for winning symbol are extracted based on the winning state, but the first special symbol or the second special symbol When winning a prize during a change, the display mode determined based on these random numbers cannot be derived immediately. Therefore, these extracted random numbers are stored in a predetermined storage area as start-up storage, and are sequentially read from the storage area when a new first special symbol or second special symbol can be changed.

  By the way, in the present invention, the first lottery means and the second lottery means are performed, and each starting memory number is counted individually. Therefore, as the random number memory means for storing the extracted random numbers, If a first random number storage means corresponding to the lottery means and a second random number storage means corresponding to the second extraction means are provided, and each random number storage means is constructed from a plurality of storage areas, each start memory It is possible to associate a value of a number (for example, “1” to “4”) with a predetermined number (for example, four) of storage areas. That is, the first lottery means will be described. When a game medium wins at the first starting slot, the first starting storage number is increased by “1”, and the extracted random number is stored in correspondence with the value of the first starting storage number. On the other hand, after the derivation (variation display) of the first display mode or the second display mode is completed, it is stored in the storage region associated with the value of the first start memory number. It is possible to read the random number value. The same applies to the second lottery means, and the random number value corresponding to the second reserved value can be stored and read out independently of the first starting stored number.

  However, the first random number storage means (multiple storage areas) corresponding to the first lottery means and the second random number storage means (multiple storage areas) corresponding to the second lottery means are separately constructed in this way. Then, since each lottery means is not associated with the winning order of the game media, it is difficult to specify one random number storage means according to the winning order. In other words, in order to derive the display mode according to the winning order of the game media, a storage means for storing the correspondence between the type of lottery and the winning order must be provided separately, and the processing contents in the hold / digestion are accordingly reduced. The complexity increases and the required capacity of the storage means increases.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 18, common random number storage means is provided as means for storing the random numbers extracted in the two lotteries. The random number storage means has a total start memory number (“1” to “m”) that is the sum of the first start memory number corresponding to the first lottery means and the second start memory number corresponding to the second lottery means. It consists of m storage areas each associated with a value.

  The first lottery means will be described. When a game medium is detected by the first winning state detection means while any special symbol is changing, the first starting memory number has reached the upper limit (for example, “4”). If not, the value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the first hit determination random number and the first hit design random number are extracted. Further, each extracted random number and a discrimination flag indicating that these random numbers are random numbers relating to the first lottery means are stored in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total start memory number. After that, when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, that is, when it becomes possible to vary the new special symbol, the total of the starting memory number is not “0”. Based on the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting storage number “1”, it is determined whether the random number stored in the storage area is a random number related to the first lottery means, and the first lottery means Is read, the first hit determination random number and the first hit symbol random number stored in the storage area are read out, the value of the first start memory number is decreased by “1”, and each storage Each random number value and determination flag stored in the area n are shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  On the other hand, the same applies to the second lottery means. When a game medium is detected by the second winning state detection means during any special symbol change, the second starting memory number is set to the upper limit (for example, “4”). If not reached, the value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, and at least the second hit determination random number and the second hit design random number are extracted. Further, each extracted random number and a discrimination flag indicating that these random numbers are random numbers related to the second lottery means are stored in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total start memory number. Thereafter, when a new special symbol can be changed, the random number stored in the storage area is related to the second lottery means based on the determination flag stored in the storage area corresponding to the total starting storage number “1”. It is determined whether or not it is a random number, and if it is a random number related to the second lottery means, the second hit determination random number and the second hit design random number stored in the storage area are read and the second start The value of the stored number is decreased by “1”, and each random number value and the determination flag stored in each storage area n are shifted to n−1 storage areas.

  As described above, when a game medium wins one of the first start opening and the second start opening, each random number is extracted, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the storage area in the order of winning. Therefore, it becomes possible to associate the winning order of the game media with the random value. Moreover, in addition to the extracted random number, a determination flag indicating the type of the lottery means is stored in each storage area, so when deriving the display mode, is it derived as the first special symbol for the first lottery means? It is possible to determine whether to derive the second special symbol for the second lottery means. Further, since the pending digest process in the two lottery means can be executed by one random number storage means, the reserve digest process is simplified and the capacity of the storage means is reduced.

Means 19: “The first decorative design is changed by the effect display means in accordance with the change of the first special design, and the first decorative design is stopped at a predetermined stop design based on the lottery result of the first lottery means. First decorative design variation control means for causing,
A second decorative symbol is changed by the effect display means in accordance with the change of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result of the second lottery means. It further includes a decorative symbol variation control means. ”

  According to the configuration of the means 19, at least a decorative symbol is derived as the contents of the effect relating to each lottery means, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the first decorative symbol variation control means varies the first decorative symbol and stops the first decorative symbol at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result of the first lottery means. The second decorative symbol variation control means varies the second decorative symbol and stops the second decorative symbol at a predetermined stop symbol based on the lottery result of the second lottery means. That is, when a game medium wins at the first start port and the second start port, the decorative symbol sequence is sequentially changed and stopped.

Means 20: In the constitution of means 19, “having a common decorative symbol sequence associated with both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol,
It further comprises a decorative symbol sequence fluctuation control means for changing the common decorative symbol sequence by the effect display means when variably displaying either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. To do.

  By the way, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be sequentially changed, and are not changed at the same timing. Therefore, when displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol on the display means, only one decorative symbol may be selectively displayed while switching the display state. However, according to this, the display screen is frequently switched, and the change of the display screen may cause the player to be serious and troublesome. In order to alleviate this burden, etc., it is conceivable that the respective decorative symbols are the same or similar to each other, but according to this, the displayed decorative symbol is the first lottery means applied to the first lottery means. It is difficult to identify whether it is a decorative symbol or a second decorative symbol related to the second lottery means. On the other hand, it is also possible to divide the display screen into an area for the first decorative design and an area for the second decorative design so that two decorative designs are always displayed. However, according to this configuration, one of the areas always has meaningless display, i.e., no change, and the display area for one decorative design is halved, so the visibility is reduced and the stop symbol is recognized. There is concern that it will be difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 20, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed on the display means, and a common decorative design sequence associated with both decorative designs is also displayed simultaneously. When either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, the common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as a common decorative symbol sequence) also varies. Therefore, by recognizing the display position of a fluctuating decorative symbol among the decorative symbols displayed at the same time, it is possible to easily grasp which lottery is being performed, and to produce an effect by a decorative symbol sequence. The contents and stop symbols can be recognized by the common decorative symbol sequence. In other words, even if the size of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is relatively small, the presence or absence of fluctuation can be recognized. It is possible to produce a powerful effect by displaying a common decorative design row.

  Means 21: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 20, “The gaming machine is a pachinko machine”. A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium that is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine and a game medium that is a medium that is used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. For example, it is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launcher to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, and “typical state detection means for detecting the state of entrance to the entrance (typically, game state detection) represented by what is generally called“ digipachi ” Means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the entry is detected by the entrance state detecting means, and a special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "In addition, what further includes an effect display means for causing a decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols to change and display characters etc. at a predetermined timing while the special symbols are changing", “Represented by what is generally called“ Honey ”” “Represented by those having lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in the game”, generally represented by “Alepati” For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls such as 16, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out in accordance with the manner of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances in one game. can do.

  According to the structure of the means 21, in the pachinko machine, any operational effect from the means 1 to the means 20 can be achieved.

  Means 22: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 20, "The gaming machine is a pachislot machine". A pachislot machine is used to insert a medal, which is a game medium, and after a medal is inserted, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever), and then a stop This is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of an operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  According to the means 22, any effect of the means 1 to means 20 can be achieved in the pachislot machine.

  Means 23: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 20, “The gaming machine is a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine”. Here, “a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused” means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium has been input, the starting operation means A symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in response to an operation of the operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  According to the means 23, in the gaming machine formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, any one of the effects from the means 1 to the means 20 can be achieved.

  At first glance, there is a game medium in a game machine that does not perform a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine exemplified above or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that a game played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  As described above, in the present invention, even when a low-winning hit occurs, the player can be inferred that the win is a high-winning advantage, and a decrease in the willingness to play is suppressed. be able to. Moreover, since the possibility that the probability fluctuation state has occurred is gradually increased by the effects that appear in stages, a decrease in expectation can be suppressed. In addition, in the high-probability expectation small production, the production of giving production points is performed, but even if the total of the production points reaches a certain value, it does not immediately shift to the high-probability expectation large production. Can be aroused. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the end of the game due to a decrease in game motivation as much as possible.

Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 2.
FIG. 1 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened on one side of the outer frame of the pachinko machine and the front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. It is. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative member in the game area is omitted.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. On one side of the front surface of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 is attached by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[Configuration of Main Body Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 3.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main frame of the pachinko machine and the game board separated from the front right and diagonally.
The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12, and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 2). A main body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the front frame body 11, and a hinge pin and a hinge are connected to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed by a hole. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is configured by the outer frame side hinge tool 14, the main body frame side hinge tool 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17. In addition, in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[Configuration of Front Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 2.
The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes. In addition, a substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. Further, a window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is mounted on the window frame 39. . Further, substantially the entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, around the opening window 38, a side decoration device 52 is mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic decoration device 53 is mounted on the upper portion. The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit. A button 59 that can be operated by the player is provided on the left side of the upper plate 51.

[Configuration of Locking Device] A description will be given based on FIGS. 2 and 3.
A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted. That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that detachably engage with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that detachably engage with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the front end of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. A cylinder lock 75 that is exposed through the front frame 11 and the lower front plate 30 is provided so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[Configuration of Game Board Mounting Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 2 to 4.
FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11, and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. . The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 9). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78. A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. It is configured to be guided to the lower plate 31. Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. There is provided a box mounting base 91 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion. A sub-control board box 93 in which a sub-control board 92 such as a sound control board and a lamp control board is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 91 and is superposed on the rear side of the sub-control board box 93. A main control board box 95 in which the main control board 94 is accommodated is mounted. Further, in a state where the box mounting base 91, the sub control board box 93 and the main control board box 95 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 91, the sub control board box 93, and the main control board box 95 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so as to be fitted and mounted.

[Configuration of Main Body Frame Mechanism Mounted Body, Ball Tank, and Tank Rail] A description will be given based on FIGS.
FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.
A tank mounting portion 111, a rail mounting portion 112, a dispensing device mounting portion 113, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 114 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 111. The ball tank 114 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 114 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 114. In addition, a discharge port 116 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 115 of the ball tank 114, and the bottom plate portion 115 is formed on an inclined surface inclined downward toward the discharge port 116. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 112 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 111 downward, and the rail component 117 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 112 so that the tank rail 118 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 111 is formed in a state where the upper lateral direction portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118. An inclined rail shelf 120 that is inclined downward from one end (left end toward FIG. 8) to the other end (right end toward FIG. 8) is formed along the lower edge of the recess. An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 120 is used as a rail receiving portion 121.

  A rail constituting member 117 which is mounted on the rail mounting portion 112 and constitutes the tank rail 118 includes a rear wall portion 122 which forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 112 and the front wall portion 119, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation. The rail constituting member 117 is attached to the rail attaching portion 112 by an appropriate attachment means, thereby forming a tank rail 118 having a plurality of front and rear rows of rail passages. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 116 of the ball tank 114 (falling due to its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 118, the game balls follow the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage. Further, in this embodiment, the rail constituent member 117 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 122 of the rail constituent member 117. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118 (rail mounting portion 112) is separated from the first space portion in order to avoid interference with the upper end portion of the rear portion of the equipment (for example, an accessory) protruding to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in the state. In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 120 that is the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 118 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 114. In other words, the tank rail 118 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 114 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 114. As a result, a first space portion is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118 to avoid interference with the rear portion of the equipment (for example, an accessory). .

  Above the tank rail 118, a rectifying body 123 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 124. The rectifier 123 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configurations of Dispensing Device Mounting Unit and Ball Dispensing Device] A description will be given based on FIGS. 7 and 8.
A vertically long paying device mounting portion 113 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 125 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 113 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side. In addition, an opening 127 through which a payout motor 126 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 125 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 113. Yes.

  In a state where the ball payout device 125 is mounted in the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion that is substantially at the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the payout device mounting portion 113, the rear end of the rail shelf 120, the ball tank 114, the tank rail 118, and the ball payout device 125 are substantially the same surface. ing.

  The ball payout device 125 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113, and is unitized by mounting various components related to payout. The ball payout device 125 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). It has become.

  Although not shown, the ball payout device 125 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 118 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Also, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of prize balls, a ball rental ball passage and a ball removal ball passage. In addition, a payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear part of the main body frame] A description will be given based on FIGS.
On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit 130 that is assembled with a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 128 that operates the launching hammer, and the like, assembled on the mounting substrate 129. Is installed. In addition, a power supply board box 132 that accommodates the power supply board 131 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 133 is placed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 132. A payout control board box 134 to be accommodated is mounted. The payout control board 133 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 94 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 126 is controlled.

[Configuration of Rear Cover Body] A description will be given based on FIGS. 4 and 5.
FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.
The rear end portions of the display device control board box 135 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 95 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. . And between the side wall part which comprises one side wall of the window opening part of the mechanism mounting body 13, and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting part 113 which comprises the other side wall, a substantially square box shape is formed by an opaque synthetic resin material. The formed rear cover body 136 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 137.

  The rear cover body 136 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 138 and a peripheral wall portion 139 protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 138. Of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, the wall portion 139 a on one side is attached and detached from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 140 formed at a total of three positions above and below the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 142 having a hinge pin 141 that can be fitted downward is integrally formed. Further, of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, the other wall portion 139 b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 113. The elastic closing body 143 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 136, the hinge pins 141 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 142 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 140 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 136 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 141, and the elastic closing body 143 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 113. The rear cover body 136 is held in a closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 136 covers the entire display device control board box 135 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 95 by the rear cover body 136. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 94 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 95 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display apparatus control board) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 95 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 136. The inspection connector 144 arranged on the main control board 94 is exposed at the lower part of the main control board box 95, and the inspection connector on the main control board 94 is closed with the rear cover body 136 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 144 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 145, 146, 147, and 148 are provided in the rear cover body 136, and internal heat is released from the large number of heat radiation holes 145, 146, 147, and 148. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 136 is provided with a number of slit-like heat radiation holes 145 extending from the peripheral wall portion 139 to the rear wall portion 138, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 138 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 146 are provided therethrough, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 147 and a predetermined number of laterally rectangular heat radiation holes 148 pass through the lower portion of the rear wall 138. It is installed.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation hole 148 has a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of a plurality of parallel seal portions 149 sealed by the seal screw (sealing member) of the main control board box 95. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 136 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 149 of the main control board box 95 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 148. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 136 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 149 of the main control board box 95 can be easily visually confirmed. In addition, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 136 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, at a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper side wall portion 139c, a power cord (not shown) is held in a substantially folded state so as to be appropriately folded. An elastically deformable cord holder 150 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 118 (the rear wall surface of the rail component member 117). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 150 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 150.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 152 of the distribution board 151, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, by forming the cord holder 150 integrally with the rear cover body 136 and holding the power cord, the power cord hangs when the pachinko machine 1 is transported and stored, or it may become an obstacle. The trouble which is caught can be prevented.

[Configuration of Sphere Derivative for Lower Plate, etc. at Lower Lower Side of Main Body Frame] A description will be given based on FIGS. 1 and 6.
6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.
A lower dish ball derivative 153 is attached to the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear stepped portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 153 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connection path (not shown) from the winning ball and rental ball passage of the ball dispensing device 125 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 155 that houses the interface board 154 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower dish ball derivative 153. The interface board 154 is interposed between the ball lending machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 133, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball lending between the ball lending machine and the payout control board 133. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a configuration of a game board having a game area. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board from an oblique front, and FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the game board from an oblique rear. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main control board box, the sub control board box and the like in FIG. 12 are removed. FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing the game board disassembled and shown obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 14, the game board 5 has a substantially circular opening 210 and a front component member including a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 for guiding a game ball in the opening 210. 79, the front component member 79 is attached to the front side, and a plate-like game board base 212 having a plurality of through holes 211 having an appropriate shape, and the game board base 212 so as to cover the through holes 211 of the game board base 212 Main character 213 attached to the front side of the player, main prize port unit 214 and game area decoration 215, rear decoration 216 corresponding to the main character 213 and attached to the rear side of the game board base 212, and rear decoration 216 which is placed behind the game board base 212 and a play invitation that guides the game balls won in the main winning opening unit 214 to be discharged. And a member 218 mainly includes.

  In the game board 5, a game area 37 is mainly defined inside the opening 210 in the front component member 79 and on the front side of the game board base 212. In the game area 37, as shown in FIG. A large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill 219 is provided at an appropriate position in the middle of the nail, and the above-mentioned main character 213, main winning port unit 214, and game area A decorative body 215 is arranged. Note that an out-port 220 is provided at the lowermost center of the game area 37 to discharge game balls that have not won a prize-winning hole or the like from the game area 37.

(About the composition of the main character)
Next, a specific configuration of the main character 213 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a front view of the main character, FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the main character from an oblique front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing the main character from an oblique rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main character disassembled and shown obliquely from the front. FIG. 19 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the stage of the main character in an enlarged manner. 20 is a perspective view showing the left and right movable decorative bodies and the decorative body drive unit. FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing the left movable decorative body obliquely from the rear. FIG. 20B is an exploded view of the left movable decorative body. And it is a disassembled perspective view shown from diagonally forward. FIG. 22A is a perspective view showing the right movable decorative body obliquely from the rear, and FIG. 22B is a perspective view showing the right movable decorative body exploded from the oblique front. FIG. 23A is an exploded perspective view of the left movable decorative body drive unit, and FIG. 23B is an exploded perspective view of the right movable decorative body drive unit. Further, FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the left and right movable decorative bodies.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the main character 213 in the game board 5 is a frame-shaped decorative body 230 formed in a frame shape, and a character body 231 attached to the lower right edge on the front side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. And a decorative member 232 that is attached to the upper edge of the front side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 and slightly to the right, and is attached to the rear side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 so as to close the opening of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. A transparent plate-shaped partition plate 233, a right movable decorative body 234 and a left movable decorative body 235 disposed on the lower front side of the upper edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 230, and a rear side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. The right movable decorative body driving unit 236 and the left movable decorative body driving unit 237 are provided for rotating the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 about predetermined axes, respectively.

  The main character 213 further includes a chucker 238 capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area 37. The chucker 238 is attached to the left edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 and detects a passage of the game ball, and has an opening that covers the passage detection sensor 239 from the front and allows the game ball to pass in the vertical direction. The chucker cover 240 is provided. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 37 enters from the upper side of the chucker cover 240, the chucker 238 detects the game ball by the passage detection sensor 239, and then detects the detected game ball on the lower side of the chucker cover 240. The game area 37 is returned to the game area 37 again.

  The main decorative body 213 has a frame-shaped decorative body 230 provided with a warp inlet 250 below a portion to which the passage detection sensor 238 is attached, and below the warp inlet 250 the inner side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. A warp outlet 251 is formed in the frame-shaped decorative body 230, and a warp passage 252 that connects the warp inlet 250 and the warp outlet 251 is formed inside the frame-shaped decorative body 230. The warp passage 252 is formed by closing an opening portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 formed in a U-shape in cross section by a part of the partition plate 233, and a game ball that flows down along the game board surface Can be taken in from the outer side (outer periphery) of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 to the inner side through the warp passage 252.

  The frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 has a rolling surface 253 that can be continuously rolled from the warp outlet 251 of the warp passage 252 on the upper surface of the lower edge portion, and can roll the game ball in the left-right direction. A stage 256 is provided which is provided on the front side of the surface 253 and includes a weir portion 255 having a predetermined height and having open portions 254 on the left and right. In this stage 256, the game ball taken in through the warp passage 252 is rolled in the left-right direction so that various changes can be made in its movement, and the game ball rolling on the stage 256 is It flows out from the opening part 254 to the front of the stage 256. The game balls on the stage 256 are prevented from flowing out behind the stage 256 by the partition plate 233 attached to the rear side of the frame-shaped decorative body 230.

  In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 further includes a ball guiding path 257 for guiding the game ball on the stage 256 so as to flow down almost right above the center of the main winning prize opening unit 214. The ball guide path 257 is disposed substantially at the center so as to sandwich the left and right opening portions 254 of the stage 256, guides the game ball to the rear side of the stage 256, and below the ball guide portion 258 and on the stage 256. A ball receiving portion 259 that extends to the rear side and is capable of receiving a game ball from above, and a ball outlet that opens the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 259 below the ball guide portion 258 and on the front side of the stage 256 And a sphere guiding portion 261 that guides the fluid so as to flow out from 260. Note that a ball guiding recess 262 that protrudes rearward is formed in a substantially central lower portion of the partition plate 233, and the game ball guided to the rear side of the stage 256 by the ball guiding portion 258 is guided to the ball guiding recess 262. Thus, the ball receiving portion 259 can be satisfactorily received without flowing out to the rear side of the partition plate 233.

  Further, the frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 has a surface on the opposite side of the warp passage 252 across the stage 256 so that the central side in the left-right direction of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 is slightly lowered. Further provided is an extended rolling surface 263 that is continuous with the rolling surface 253. The extended rolling surface 263 is taken in from the warp inlet 250 and supplied to the stage 256 at a predetermined initial speed via the warp passage 252, gets over the weir portion 255 of the stage 256 and flows out of the stage 256. This is intended to prevent this. As shown in the drawing, a part of the character body 231 is arranged on the front side of the extended rolling surface 263, and a groove having a predetermined depth is formed in cooperation with the partition plate 233. Thus, even if the game ball bounces on the extended rolling surface 263, it is difficult for the game ball to drop off from the extended rolling surface 263 (see FIG. 19).

  The operation of the extended rolling surface 263 will be described in detail. A game ball supplied at a predetermined initial speed through the warp passage 252 rolls from the left end of the stage 256 to the right end and is placed on the extended rolling surface 263. At that time, the stage 256 is shaped so that the center thereof is low and the left and right ends are high, so that the speed of the game ball decreases as it rolls to the right end of the stage 256, but the warp path Since the speed of the game ball circulating in the 252 is different, the initial speed when supplied to the stage 256 is also different. For example, instead of the extended rolling surface 263, a ball contact portion is provided at the right end of the stage 256. If it is provided, depending on the speed of the game ball, it will be bounced by contact with the ball contact portion, get over the weir portion 255 of the stage 256 and drop off from the stage 256, so that the game ball is satisfactorily placed on the stage 256. Can not be moving, it may not be entertained movement of game balls.

  On the other hand, in this example, the extended rolling surface 263 is provided at the right end of the stage 256, and even when a game ball that rolls at a predetermined speed reaches the right end of the stage 256, the extended rolling surface 263 is moved to. So that it can be prevented from falling off the stage 256 by being bounced at the right end of the stage 256. In addition, a groove having a predetermined depth is formed on the extended rolling surface 263 in cooperation with the character body 231 and the partition plate 233, so that even if a game ball bounces on the extended rolling surface 263, the extended rolling surface 263. The game ball can be prevented from falling off. Furthermore, since the extended rolling surface 263 is a flat surface with the center side (left end) of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 slightly lowered, the speed of the game ball rolling from the extended rolling surface 263 to the stage 263 is increased. The game ball can be returned to the stage 263 at a suitable speed, and the game ball can be favorably rolled on the stage 263.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the frame-shaped decorative body 230 of the main character 213 is provided with a ball guide path 270 capable of guiding a game ball downward along the outer periphery on the left outer periphery thereof. The ball guide path 270 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 271 of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 and the front side of the game board base 212 and extends outward so as to close the corresponding through hole 211 of the game board base 212. And a decorative flange portion 273 that extends outward at a position separated from the flange portion 272 by a predetermined distance and is decorated on the front surface. The ball guide path 270 has a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward along the board surface of the game board 5 by the outer peripheral surface 271, the flange part 272, and the decorative flange part 273 of the frame-shaped decorative body 230. It is formed, and a game ball can be distributed in the inside.

  The ball guide path 270 is provided with a plurality of protrusions (protrusions) 274 on the inner surface side (surface surfaces facing each other) of the flange portion 272 and the decorative flange portion 273, and the protrusion 274 on the flange portion 272 side The protrusions 274 on the decorative flange portion 273 side are alternately formed at positions that do not face each other. The ball guide path 270 has a plurality of protrusions 274 so that the game balls flowing down the ball guide path 270 come into contact with the protrusions 274, thereby reducing the flow speed of the game balls and increasing the flow speed of the game balls. Can be suppressed. The ball guide path 270 is formed so as to guide the game ball to the vicinity of the lower side of the main winning opening unit 214.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the ball guide path 270 guides the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 37 to the vicinity of the lower side of the main winning opening unit 214. When the game ball is guided by the game ball, the possibility of winning the main prize opening unit 214 is reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be driven so that the game ball is not guided to the ball guide path 270. Becomes monotonous and can prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, when the game ball is guided by the ball guide path 270, the flow rate of the game ball is suppressed by the projection 274, so that the game ball is prevented from being released from the ball guide path 270 and released. Prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the main prize opening unit 214, the game area decoration body 215, etc., or even if it comes into contact, the speed is reduced to reduce the impact as much as possible. It is possible to prevent 214 and the like from being damaged.

  Next, the configuration of the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235, and the right movable decorative body drive unit 236 and the left movable decorative body drive unit 237 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 of the main character 213 are rotatable between a horizontal state extending in a substantially horizontal direction and a vertical state extending in a substantially vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 24, the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are configured to be continuous decorative bodies when in a horizontal state. Characters (alphabets in this example) are three-dimensionally shaped, and these characters become predetermined words when the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are integrated.

  The right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 include a decorative portion 291 in which the character portion 290 is a translucent member, a frame-shaped main body portion 292 disposed on the rear side of the decorative portion 291, A light emitting substrate 294 provided with a plurality of LEDs 293 disposed in the main body 292, a back plate 295 disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 294 and closed within the frame of the main body 292, and extending rearward from a predetermined position. And a rotation shaft 296. A mounting boss 297 having a screw hole is formed on the rear side of the decorative portion 291, and a through hole 298 is formed in the back plate 295 at a position corresponding to the mounting boss 297 of the decorative portion 291. By screwing a screw (not shown) into the mounting boss 297 through the through hole 298 from the rear side of the back plate 295 with the main body 292 and the light emitting substrate 294 sandwiched between the decorative portion 291 and the back plate 295. These are assembled together (see FIGS. 21 and 22).

  The rotating shaft 296 is press-fitted and fixed in a mounting hole provided in the back plate 295, and the rotating shaft 296 is near the right end of the right movable decorative body 234, and the left end of the left movable decorative body 235. Each is located and fixed in the vicinity. Further, each back plate 295 is formed with a protrusion 299 at a predetermined position in the vicinity of the rotating shaft 296 on the rear surface thereof. As will be described in detail later, the protrusion 299 has a right movable decorative body 234 and a left movable decorative body. This is for detecting the respective rotational positions of 235.

  On the other hand, the right movable decorative body drive unit 236 and the left movable decorative body drive unit 237 rotate the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 around the axis of each rotation shaft 296. The right movable decorative body drive unit 236 and the left movable decorative body drive unit 237 include a movable decorative body drive motor 310 for rotating the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235 and a movable decorative body drive motor 310. A drive gear 312 fixed to the rotating shaft 311, a transmission gear 313 that meshes with the drive gear 312 and transmits the rotation of the drive gear 312, and meshes with the transmission gear 313 to rotate the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235. An output gear 314 to which the moving shaft 296 is fixed, a movable casing driving motor 310 that can be attached to the rear surface, a gear casing 315 that can accommodate the driving gear 312, the transmission gear 313, and the output gear 314, and a gear casing 315 Through-hole 3 that closes the front opening and allows the rotation shaft 296 of the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235 to pass therethrough. And a front plate 317 having a 6 (see FIG. 20, FIGS. 23 and 24).

  In the right movable decorative body drive unit 236 or the left movable decorative body drive unit 237, when the movable decorative body drive motor 310 is driven to rotate, the drive gear 312 fixed to the rotation shaft 311 rotates, and the drive gear 312 The rotation is transmitted to the output gear 314 via the transmission gear 313, and the rotation shaft 296 of the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235 fixed to the output gear 314 rotates with the output gear 314, respectively. The right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235 can be rotated around the rotation axis 296.

  Further, the right movable decorative body drive unit 236 and the left movable decorative body drive unit 237 include a rotating member 318 that rotates in accordance with the rotation of the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235, and the rotational position of the rotating member 318. And a rotational position detection sensor 319 for detecting the above. The rotating member 318 has a contact pin 320 that can contact the protrusion 299 of the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235 at one end, and a detected portion 321 detected by the rotational position detection sensor 319 at the other end. And is pivotally supported on the back side of the front plate 317 so as to be rotatable at a predetermined position between the contact pin 320 and the detected portion 321. The front plate 317 is formed with an arc-shaped elongated hole 322 into which the contact pin 320 of the rotating member 318 can be inserted, and the right movable decorative body drive unit 236 and the left movable decorative body drive unit 237 are assembled. In this state, the contact pin 320 protrudes to the front side of the front plate 317 through the long hole 322, and rotates within a predetermined rotation angle range by the arc-shaped long hole 322. ing.

  As shown in the figure, the rotating member 318 has a shape that is bent by a rotating shaft supported by the shaft, and is formed so that the detected portion 321 side is heavier than the contact pin 320 side. The contact pin 320 rotates upward due to the weight difference. The contact pin 320 of the rotating member 318 is disposed at a position where the contact pin 320 contacts the lower side of the protrusion 299 of the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body 235, and the contact pin 320 and the detected portion 321. The protrusion 299 prevents the contact pin 320 from rotating upward due to the weight difference between the protrusion 299 and the contact pin 320. In other words, the contact pin 320 rotates and moves as the protrusion 299 rotates, and the protrusion 299, that is, the right movable decorative body 234 or the left movable decorative body is detected by detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 318. The rotational position of 235 can be detected.

  In this example, the rotational position detection sensor 319 is a photosensor, and the detected portion 321 is a shielding plate for the photosensor. In this example, when the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are in the horizontal state, the detected portion 321 of each rotating member 318 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor 319, that is, the detected portion. 321 shields the photosensor.

(About the composition of the main prize opening unit, the game area decoration, and the discharge guiding member)
Next, the configuration of the main winning a prize opening unit 214, the game area decoration body 215, and the discharge guiding member 218 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the main winning a prize opening unit, the game area decoration body, and the discharge guiding member obliquely from the front. FIG. 26A is an enlarged perspective view showing the main part of the start port in the main winning a prize opening unit, and FIG. 26B is a side view thereof. FIG. 27A is a perspective view showing the main part of the attacker device in the main winning opening unit, and FIG. 27B is a side view thereof. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the main winning opening unit from the obliquely rear lower side, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing the game area decoration body from the obliquely rear side. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing the flow path of the game ball in the main winning opening unit, the game area decoration, and the discharge guiding member.

  First, as shown in the figure, the main winning opening unit 214 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion on the front side in the left-right direction and opened upward, and disposed below the first starting port 330 and the first starting port. 330 and a pair of movable pieces 331 can be closed or opened, and the rectangular large winning opening 333 and the large winning opening 333 that are disposed below the second starting opening 332 and extend in the left-right direction can be closed. And an attacker device 335 having an opening / closing door 334 whose upper side pivots forward, and a general winning opening 336 which is arranged on both the left and right sides of the attacker device 335 and opens obliquely upward so as to be separated from each other. Note that each of the pair of movable pieces 331 is rotatably supported at one end side, and provided with a projecting pin that protrudes rearward at a position eccentric from the rotating shaft.

  The main winning opening unit 214 further includes a start port opening / closing drive unit 350 that opens / closes a pair of movable pieces 331 that open / close the second start port 332 (see FIG. 26). The start port opening / closing drive unit 350 includes a start port solenoid 352 having a plunger 351 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal direction and a left-right direction (on the game board surface) as the plunger 351 moves forward and backward in the start port solenoid 352. And a transmission member 353 that rotates about a shaft extending in the vertical direction and can move a protruding pin 337 extending rearward from the pair of movable pieces 331 in the vertical direction. The transmission member 353 is formed with a locking portion 356 that locks the flange 355 at the tip of the plunger 351 on the upper side and the rear side of the rotation shaft 354, and on the front side of the rotation shaft 354. A transmission portion 357 having a U-shaped side view through which the protruding pin 337 of the movable piece 331 is inserted is formed.

  In the main winning port unit 214, when the plunger 351 of the start port solenoid 352 in the start port opening / closing drive unit 350 moves forward, the engaging portion 356 of the transmission member 353 is pressed forward, and the transmission member 353 is rotated counterclockwise in the figure. And the height of the transmission part 357 is relatively lowered, and the projecting pin 337 of the movable piece 331 is lowered with the lowering of the transmission part 357, so that the free end side of the movable piece 331 is raised. Will be. Accordingly, the pair of movable pieces 331 are in an upright state, and the second start port 332 is closed by the pair of movable pieces 331 and the first start port 330. When the plunger 351 is retracted, the reverse operation is performed, and the free end sides of the pair of movable pieces 331 are lowered so as to be separated from each other as shown in the figure, and the second start port 332 is opened. It comes to become. In addition, in the state where the second starting port 332 is opened, the opening width is wider than the opening width of the first starting port 330 so that the game ball can easily win.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, a second start port sensor 358 is provided below the start port solenoid 352, and a game ball won in the second start port 332 passes through the through hole of the second start port sensor 358. By passing, it is detected by the second start port sensor 358 and discharged from the discharge port 359 formed on the lower side of the main winning port unit 214 (see FIG. 28).

  Also, the attacker device 335 of the main winning opening unit 214 has a large winning opening sensor 370 that detects a game ball won in the winning winning opening 333 and a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction capable of closing the large winning opening 333, and the lower side is An open / close door 334 that is pivotally supported and whose upper side is rotatable forward from an upright state, an attacker solenoid 372 having a plunger 371 that can advance and retract in the front-rear direction, and a forward and backward movement of the plunger 371 in the attacker solenoid 372 in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, a transmission member 373 that rotates about an axis extending in the horizontal direction and in the left-right direction (the direction along the game board surface) to rotate the opening / closing door 334, a prize winning opening sensor 370, the opening / closing door 334, and an attacker solenoid 372. The game ball that supports the transmission member 373 and wins the prize winning opening 333 is detected by the prize winning opening sensor 370. And a casing 375 having a guide path 374 for inducing sea urchin (see FIG. 27).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 27, the attacker solenoid 372 and the transmission member 373 are housed and supported in the casing 375 at a position on the left side and the rear side of the big winning opening 333. A contact protrusion 376 that contacts the transmission member 373 is formed at the lower left end of the open / close door 334. Further, the transmission member 373 of the attacker device 335 is disposed on the upper side of the rotating shaft 377 and is disposed on the front side of the rotating shaft 377 and the engaging portion 379 that engages with the flange 378 at the tip of the plunger 371. A contact pin 380 that contacts the contact protrusion 376 of the open / close door 334 from above is provided.

  In this attacker device 335, when the plunger 371 of the attacker solenoid 372 moves forward, the engaging portion 379 of the transmission member 373 is pressed forward, and the transmission member 373 rotates counterclockwise in the figure to rotate the rotation shaft of the transmission member 373. The contact pin 380 provided in front of 377 is rotated and lowered, and the contact protrusion 376 of the opening / closing door 334 that contacts the contact pin 380 is lowered by the lowering of the contact pin 380 so that the opening / closing door 334 has its supporting shaft core. Rotate clockwise relative to. That is, as shown in the drawing, the open side with the upper side rotated forward about the lower side of the open / close door 334 rotates from the open state to the closed state in which the open / close door 334 is substantially upright, and the big prize opening 333 is closed. It has become. When the plunger 371 of the attacker solenoid 372 is retracted, the operation reverse to the above is performed so that the upper side of the open / close door 334 rotates forward and the special winning opening 333 is opened.

  In this attacker device 335, the width in the left-right direction of the special winning opening 333 is wider than the width when the pair of movable pieces 331 are opened and the second start opening 332 is opened. The game balls are easier to win. In addition, the game ball that enters from the big prize opening 333 and is detected by the big prize opening sensor 370 is discharged directly below the main prize opening unit 214 (see FIG. 28).

  The main winning opening unit 214 has a first starting opening 330, a large winning opening 333, and a general winning opening 336 formed on the front side, and an attacker device 335, a starting opening / closing drive unit 350, etc. attached to the rear side. A unit base 381 is further provided. A ball cage 382 for guiding the game ball to the rear by a predetermined distance is formed at a position corresponding to the first starting port 330, the second starting port 332, and the general winning port 336 on the rear side of the main winning port unit base. (See FIG. 25 and FIG. 28). The main winning opening unit base 381 has an outer shape larger than that of the corresponding through hole 211 formed in the game board base 212, and an attacker device 335 attached to the rear side and a start port opening / closing drive. The unit 350 has a size that can pass through the corresponding through hole 211.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the main winning opening unit 214 is attached to the game board base 212 so that the first starting port 330 is located immediately below the ball outlet 260 in the ball guiding path 257 of the main player 213. It is fixed and is arranged so that the game ball that has flowed out from the ball outlet 260 of the main character 213 is likely to win the first starting port 330 of the main winning port unit 214.

  The main winning port unit 214 of this example is attached to the game board base 212 from the front side. More specifically, the attacker device 335 and the starting port of the main winning port unit 214 are started from the front side of the game board base 212. The opening / closing drive unit 350 is inserted into the corresponding through hole 211, the rear face of the main winning hole unit base 381 is brought into contact with the front surface of the game board base 212, and the main winning hole unit base 381 is connected to the game board base 212 with screws (not shown). By fixing to, the main winning opening unit 214 is attached to the game board base 212. At this time, the corresponding through hole 211 of the game board base 212 is hidden by the main winning hole unit base 381 so as not to be seen from the front side (see FIGS. 11 and 14).

  Next, the game area decoration body 215 mainly includes a special symbol display 390, a holding lamp 391, a light emission decoration portion 393, and two general winning ports 394. This special symbol display 390 is composed of four LEDs capable of emitting a plurality of colors in this example, and in accordance with the winning of a game ball to the first start port 330 and the second start port 332, Each LED is turned off, turned on, blinked, discolored, etc., and a special symbol corresponding to each starting port is displayed.

  The hold lamp 391 is composed of four LEDs, and each LED can be turned off, blinking, and lit. The combination of blinking and lighting of these LEDs leads to the first start port 330 and the second start port 332. The number of starting suspensions due to winning of the game balls is displayed, and up to four starting suspensions can be displayed respectively.

  Further, the light emitting decoration part 393 is provided with a light emitting substrate 396 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting various colors on the rear side of the translucent lens part 395 arranged on the front side. The LED can emit light for decoration.

  In addition, the general prize opening 394 on the left side of the front view of the game area decoration body 215 is a drainage hole in which a winning game ball passes through the inside of the game area decoration body 215 and opens to the lower rear side of the game area decoration body 215. The gas is discharged from the outlet 397 to the outside. Also, the general winning opening 394 on the right side of the front view is such that the winning game ball is discharged from a discharge portion 398 provided substantially above the discharge port 397, and the game ball is slightly discharged from the discharge portion 398 to the right. It is designed to be discharged to the outside so as to be guided by The game area decoration 215 is provided with a sensor mounting portion 399 so that a game ball won in the general winning opening 394 on the left side when viewed from the front can be detected (see FIG. 29).

  The in-game area decorative body 215 is provided with a flange portion 400 extending outward from the outer shape of the corresponding through hole 211 of the game board base 212 at a substantially middle position in the front-rear direction. Then, the rear side is inserted into the corresponding through hole 211 and the rear surface side of the flange part 400 is brought into contact with the front side of the game board base 212 so as to hide the through hole 211 from the front side. Is attached to the game board base 212 with screws (not shown) from the front side thereof, so that the game area decoration body 215 is fixed to the game board base 212 (see FIGS. 11 and 14).

  Next, the discharge guiding member 218 is arranged on the rear side of the main prize opening unit 214 and the game area decoration 215 across the game board base 212, and the main prize opening unit 214 and the game fixed to the game board base 212. A game ball which is formed so as to cover a part of the portion of the in-area decoration body 215 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the game board base 212 and has won the main prize opening unit 214 and the winning opening of the in-game area decoration body 215. Are provided with various guiding paths (see FIG. 25).

  The discharge guide member 218 includes an attachment fixing portion 411 having an insertion hole 410 that is in contact with the rear surface of the game board base 212 and through which a screw (not shown) for attachment and fixation to the game board base 212 is inserted, and a main prize opening unit. The first start port corresponding to the starting recess opening / closing drive unit 350 of 214 and the housing recess 412 that can accommodate a part of the casing 375 of the attacker device 335 and the ball cage 382 that continues from the first start port 330 of the main winning port unit 214. A ball that continues from the first start port discharge guide path 413 that guides and discharges the game ball received in 330 to the lower side of the discharge guide member 218 and the general winning port 336 arranged on the right side of the main winning port unit 214 in front view. A right general winning port outlet flow path 414 for discharging the game ball corresponding to the base 382 and received in the general winning port 336 from below the discharge guiding member 218; The left general winning opening discharge which discharges from the lower part of discharge guidance member 218 the game ball corresponding to the ball bowl 382 continuing from the general winning opening 336 arranged in the front view left side of the prize opening unit 214 and received in the general winning opening 336 A first start port sensor 416 for detecting that a game ball has won the first start port 330 by detecting a game ball flowing in the flow path 415, the first start port discharge flow path 413, and a right general prize A right general winning port sensor 417a that detects that a game ball has won the right general winning port 336 by detecting a gaming ball in the mouth discharging channel 414, and a gaming ball in the left general winning port outlet channel 415 And a left general winning opening sensor 417b for detecting that a game ball has won the left general winning opening 336.

  The discharge guiding member 218 discharges the game ball received in the two general winning ports 394 of the game area decoration body 215 to the lower side of the discharging guiding member 218 via the left general winning port discharge channel 415. It has become. Specifically, the left general winning a prize outlet discharge channel 415 receives a game ball discharged from the outlet 397 of the game area decoration body 215 and guides it to the left general winning prize sensor 417b, A second guiding portion 419 that receives the game ball discharged from the discharge portion 398 of the game area decoration body 215 and guides it to the left general winning a prize port sensor 417b. The second guide portion 419 is formed with a sensor mounting portion 420 so that a game ball in the second guide portion 419 can be detected.

  As described above, the discharge guiding member 218 detects the game balls received at the first start port 330 and the general winning ports 336 and 394 in the main prize opening unit 214 and the game area decoration body 215 and discharge guidance. It can discharge | emit below the member 218 (refer FIG. 30). It should be noted that the left general prize opening sensor is not only a game ball received in the general prize opening 336 on the left side of the main prize opening unit 214 but also a game ball received in the two general prize outlets 394 of the ornament 215 in the game area. Can also be detected, and the number of detection sensors can be reduced with respect to the number of winning holes. The game area decoration body 215 and the discharge guide member 218 are provided with a sensor attachment portion 399 and a sensor attachment portion 420, respectively, and by attaching a detection sensor of a game ball to these sensor attachment portions 399 and 420, It is possible to discriminate which of the above winning holes has received the game ball, so that each winning port can be differentiated.

(Regarding the configuration of the back decoration)
Next, the configuration of the rear decoration body 216 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 52. FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing the rear decorative body from an oblique front, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear decorative body from the oblique forward. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration body shown obliquely from the rear. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the first decorative movable body unit in the rear decorative body from obliquely forward, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the first decorative movable body unit disassembled for each main part and shown obliquely from the front. 36A is an exploded perspective view showing the first decorative movable body in the first decorative movable body unit disassembled and shown obliquely from the front, and FIG. 36B is an enlarged front view showing the lens portion in the first decorative movable body. It is. FIG. 37 is a perspective view showing the first decorative movable body drive unit in the first decorative movable body unit obliquely from the front, and FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing the first decorative movable body drive unit from the oblique rear. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the first decorative movable body drive unit disassembled for each main part. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view further exploded than FIG. 41A is a perspective view showing a first elevating member in the first decorative movable body drive unit, and FIG. 41B is an exploded perspective view of the first elevating member. FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the first decorative movable body solenoid and the rotation transmitting member in the first elevating member. FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing the second decorative movable body unit in the rear decorative body from obliquely forward, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view showing the main part of the second decorative movable body unit disassembled from the diagonally front. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view showing the second decorative movable body in the second decorative movable body unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 46 is a perspective view showing the second decorative movable body drive unit in the second decorative movable body unit obliquely from the front. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the second decorative movable body drive unit disassembled for each main part. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view further exploded than FIG. 49A is a perspective view showing a second elevating member in the second decorative movable body drive unit, and FIG. 49B is an exploded perspective view of the second elevating member. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second decorative movable body solenoid and the link mechanism in the second elevating member. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the decorative movable body unit cover obliquely from the front, and FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing the main part of the decorative movable body unit cover.

  After this, the decorative body 216 is attached and fixed on the rear side of the game board base 212 on the right side of the center in front view, and moves mainly in the vertical direction, and the upper part of the face including the upper jaw of a predetermined character is shaped. First decorative movable body unit 431 having 430, and mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of game board base 212 on the opposite side in the left-right direction with respect to first decorative movable body unit 431, and vertically below first decorative movable body 430 A second decorative movable body unit 433 having a second decorative movable body 432 in which the lower jaw corresponding to the first decorative movable body 430 is formed, and the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit. A decorative movable body unit cover 435 that covers the outer peripheral side and the rear side of 433, has a rectangular opening 434 in the center, and can be mounted with an effect display device 217 on the rear side, and a first decorative movable body unit. A first decorative body 436 disposed between 431 and the decorative movable body unit cover 435, and a second decorative body 437 disposed between the second decorative movable body unit 433 and the decorative movable body unit cover 435. I have.

  Thereafter, the decorative body 216 causes the first decorative movable body 430 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body 432 of the second decorative movable body unit 433 to approach or separate from each other. By moving each of them up and down, it is possible to perform an effect operation such that the mouth of a predetermined character opens or closes.

  Thereafter, the first decorative movable body unit 431 of the decorative body 216 moves the first decorative movable body 430 in which the upper part of the face between the upper jaw and the eyebrows of the predetermined character is shaped, and the first decorative movable body 430 in the vertical direction. And is rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction of the game board 5 and attached to the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 which is attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the game board base 212, and the first decorative movable body drive unit 450. And a unit decoration body 451 for decoration.

  The first decorative movable body 430 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 has sunglasses 453 having a substantially black lens portion 452 and a first decorative movable body having an opening hole 454 that penetrates at a position corresponding to the eyes of the character. Light emission in which a body main body 455 and a plurality of LEDs 456 that are arranged on the rear side of the first decorative movable body main body 455 and can emit light of a predetermined color are provided on the front side through the opening holes 454 of the first decorative movable body main body 455. The base plate 457 is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 457, and includes a sunglasses 453, a first decorative movable body main body 455, and a base member 458 assembled integrally with the light emitting substrate 457.

  As shown in the drawing, the lens portion 452 of the sunglasses 453 in the first decorative movable body 430 has a pattern appearing on the surface according to the color of light emitted from the LED 456 of the light emitting substrate 457. Specifically, When a red light is emitted from the LED 456, a “crescent-like pattern” appears, and when a blue light is emitted from the LED 456, a “predetermined Chinese character” (here, “place”) related to the character appears. It has become. The lens portion 452 has a structure in which the “crescent-shaped pattern” and the “predetermined Chinese character” are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the overlapped portion is colorless or white and has a translucent white portion 459. The portion where the “crescent-shaped pattern” does not overlap is the red portion 460 having red translucency, and the portion where the “predetermined Chinese character” does not overlap is the blue portion 461 having blue translucency. The other part is a black part 462 that is substantially black.

  In this example, since the lens portion 452 has the above-described configuration, for example, when red light is emitted from the LED 456, the red light is transmitted through the white portion 459 and the red portion 460, and the blue portion 461 and the black portion 462 are transmitted. Then, since red light is not transmitted, a “crescent-shaped pattern” by the white portion 459 and the red portion 460 appears. On the other hand, when the blue light is emitted from the LED 456, the blue light is transmitted through the white portion 459 and the blue portion 461, and the blue light is not transmitted through the red portion 460 and the black portion 462. The “predetermined kanji” will appear. As described above, by appropriately combining the colored light and the colored member having translucency, a desired pattern can be easily displayed without using an expensive display device such as an LCD. .

  In this example, the light emitting substrate 457 to which the LED 456 is attached is formed on a highly light-shielding member. Specifically, a light shielding member made of a black paint or black film having a high light shielding property is provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 457. As a result, light other than the LED 456 is prevented from entering from the rear side of the lens unit 452, and when the LED 456 is turned off, the white part 459, the red part 460, and the blue part 461 other than the black part 462 can be seen. It comes to suppress. In addition, the LED 456 is used as the light source, and the wavelength band of the emitted color is narrow compared with other light sources, and the content of other color components is small, so that a desired color pattern can be more reliably displayed. It has become.

  Further, the first decorative movable body 430 is provided with a fixing portion 463 for fixing and supporting the first decorative movable body driving unit 450 on the base member 458, and the first decorative movable body is provided by the fixed portion 463. 430 is supported by the first decorative movable body drive unit 450.

  Next, the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 supports the first decorative movable body 430 and moves the first decorative movable body 430 in the vertical direction together with the first decorative movable body 430, and the first vertical movable member 470 in the vertical direction. A guide rail 471 for guiding, a first upper support member 472 for supporting the upper end portion of the guide rail 471, a first lower support member 473 for supporting the lower end portion of the guide rail 471, the first upper support member 472, and the first A first base 475 which has a mounting contact surface 474 which supports the lower support member 473 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and abuts against the rear surface side of the game board base 212 and is formed by bending a sheet metal; A first drive motor 477 that is disposed on the opposite side of the first upper support member 472 of the 475 and that projects through the first base 475 and the first upper support member 472 and whose rotating drive shaft 476 protrudes; A drive pulley 478 that rotates as the drive shaft 476 of the first drive motor 477 rotates, a driven pulley 479 disposed near the first lower support member 473 so as to be paired with the drive pulley 478, and a drive pulley 478 and a driven pulley 479, and a belt fixing portion 481 for connecting and fixing a part of the driving belt 480 to the first elevating member 470.

  In this example, the rotation of the drive pulley 478 by the first drive motor 477 is performed when the rotation of the drive gear 482 fixed to the drive shaft 476 of the first drive motor 477 is arranged above the drive gear 482. The drive pulley 478 is rotationally driven by being transmitted to a transmission gear 483 that meshes with 482 and rotates integrally with the drive pulley 478. By using the drive gear 482 and the transmission gear 483, the position of the drive pulley 478 is made higher than the drive shaft 476 of the first drive motor 477 so that the vertical movable range of the first elevating member 470 is increased. It has become. Further, the inner peripheral surface of the drive belt 480 is provided with engagement teeth 484 at predetermined intervals over the entire circumference, and the drive pulley 478 has engaged teeth 485 that engage with the engagement teeth 484. The rotational drive of the drive pulley 478 is reliably transmitted to the drive belt 480 by the engagement between the engaged teeth 485 and the engagement teeth 484. The driven pulley 479 is a flat pulley without engaged teeth.

  The first decorative movable body drive unit 450 is further provided with first rotation preventing means 490 for preventing the first elevating member 470 from rotating about the axial direction in which the guide rail 471 extends. The first rotation preventing means 490 includes a guide rod 491 supported at the upper and lower ends thereof by the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473, and disposed substantially parallel to the guide rail 471, and the front-rear direction. A guide member 492 that can be brought into contact with the guide rod 491 and attached to the first elevating member 470. As shown in the figure, the first rotation preventing means 490 has a guide rod 491 disposed on the right side of the guide rail 471 at a predetermined distance and a guide member 492 having a substantially U-shaped cross section. The first elevating member 470 can be satisfactorily prevented from rotating around the axis of the guide rail 471 by abutting on any one of the front and rear sides.

  In this example, the guide rail 471 and the guide rod 491 are both metal round bars, and a friction reducing layer for reducing sliding resistance is formed on the surface of the guide rail 471. The friction reducing layer is coated with, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE, (for example, Teflon (registered trademark))) as a fluororesin with a predetermined thickness, and is thereby guided by the guide rail 471. The value of the dynamic friction resistance of the first elevating member 470 and the value of the static friction resistance can be made as close as possible, and when the stationary first elevating member 470 starts moving, the movement can be started smoothly, The durability of the guide rail 471 and the like can be reduced by reducing wear. Further, the surface of the guide rod 491 is chrome-plated to prevent corrosion such as rust and improve durability, and it is less expensive than the guide rail 471 and prevents an increase in cost. It can be done.

  The first decorative movable body drive unit 450 further includes a tension mechanism 493 that applies a predetermined tension to the drive belt 480. The tension mechanism 493 is guided by the guide rail 471 and rotatably supports the driven pulley 479, and one end is attached to the moving body 494 and the other end is attached to the first base 475, and the moving body 494 is moved downward. And a tension spring 495 for biasing.

  The moving body 494 of the tension mechanism 493 includes a guide hole 496 through which the guide rail 471 is inserted, a hook-shaped locking portion 498 that locks the shaft portion 497 that is opened downward and protrudes from both ends of the driven pulley 479, and a guide. A spring mounting portion 499 that is disposed between the hole 496 and the locking portion 498 and attaches one end of the tension spring 495 is provided. As a result, the driven pulley 479 can be supported by the movable body 494 in a state where the drive belt 480 is wound around the driven pulley 479, and assembly is facilitated. Further, since the drive belt 480 is pulled by the tension spring 495 between the guide hole 496 and the locking portion 498 that locks the shaft portion 497 of the driven pulley 479, the guide hole is guided with respect to the shaft of the guide rail 471. The shaft of 496 can be prevented from being greatly inclined, the sliding resistance of the moving body 494 on the guide rail 471 is prevented from increasing, the moving body 494 can move smoothly, and the moving body The posture of 494 is prevented from changing greatly, and the drive belt 480 is tensioned well.

  In the first decorative movable body drive unit 450, as shown in the figure, the drive pulley 478 is disposed on the upper side and the driven pulley 479 is disposed on the lower side, and the drive wound around the drive pulley 478 and the driven pulley 479 is driven. The belt 480 is urged downward by the tension mechanism 493 via the driven pulley 479. Further, since the first elevating member 470 is fixed to the driving belt 480, the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 is applied to the driving belt 480 and pulled downward only to one side of the driving belt 480. A force is applied, and the driving belt 480 is strongly wound around the driving pulley 478 by the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430.

  On the other hand, the upper drive pulley 478 is provided with engaged teeth 485 that engage with the engagement teeth 484 of the drive belt 480, and the drive belt depends on the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430. When 480 is tightly wound around the drive pulley 478, the engagement between the engagement tooth 484 of the drive belt 480 and the engaged tooth 485 of the drive pulley 478 becomes stronger, and the drive pulley 478 is driven by the first drive motor 477. By blocking the rotation, the rotation of the drive belt 480 is blocked, and the weights of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 are supported by the drive pulley 478 via the drive belt 480. The weight of the elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 is not applied to the lower driven pulley 479 or the tension mechanism 493. As a result, the first elevating member 470 and the like can be moved up and down satisfactorily without applying an extra load to the tension mechanism 493, and the cost of the tension mechanism 493 and the like with the urging force by the tension mechanism 493 being minimized. Can be reduced.

  By the way, when the vertical arrangement of the driving pulley 478, the driven pulley 479, and the tension mechanism 493 is reversed, the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 is applied to the driven pulley 479 via the driving belt 480. The driven pulley 479 is not provided with an engaged tooth that engages with the engaging tooth 484 of the drive belt 480, and the driven pulley 479 is configured to freely rotate. The weights of the lifting member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 cannot be supported, and the first lifting member 470 is lowered and the drive belt 480 is rotated in a predetermined direction. Further, in the lower drive pulley 478, the drive belt 480 is pulled downward by the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430, so that the winding force of the drive belt 480 on the drive pulley 478 is weakened. That is, the engagement between the engagement teeth 484 of the drive belt 480 and the engaged teeth 485 of the drive pulley 478 is weakened, and it becomes easy to slip.

  When slippage occurs between the drive pulley 478 and the drive belt 480, the drive belt 480 is rotated by the weight of the first elevating member 470 and the first decorative movable body 430 regardless of the rotation of the first drive motor 477. As a result, the first elevating member 470 is lowered, and the first elevating member 470 cannot be moved up and down satisfactorily. Therefore, it is conceivable to prevent slippage between the drive pulley 478 and the drive belt 480 by increasing the urging force by the tension mechanism 493. However, when the urging force is increased, not only the tension mechanism 493 but also the drive pulley 478, It is necessary to increase the strength of the driven pulley 479, the drive belt 480, the first base 475, and the like, which causes a problem that the cost of the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 is increased. It is desirable to arrange the pulley 478 on the upper side and the driven pulley 479 on the lower side.

  In the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 of this example, the first base 475 is provided with a positioning hole 510 for positioning the mounting positions of the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473. In addition, positioning protrusions 511 that fit into the positioning holes 510 are respectively formed on the contact portions of the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 with the first base 475. As a result, the positioning protrusions 511 of the corresponding first upper support member 473 and first lower support member 473 are fitted into the positioning holes 510 of the first base 475 and then fixed to the first base 475. Thus, the first upper support member 472 and the first lower support member 473 can be accurately positioned at predetermined positions, and the assembly accuracy of the guide rail 471, the drive pulley 478, the driven pulley 479, and the like can be highly accurately and easily performed. Can be assembled. A mounting hole 512 for mounting and fixing to the game board base 212 is formed in the mounting contact surface 474 of the first base 475.

  In the first decorative movable body drive unit 450, as shown in the drawing, a mounting contact surface 474 of the first base 475 is provided on the upper portion of the first base 475, and the first base 475 has a first contact with the game board base 212. Only the upper part of one base 475 is fixedly attached. Thereby, the attachment location to the game board base 212 can be decreased, and an assembly cost can be reduced. In addition, the first base 475 is fixed to the game board base 212 at the upper part, that is, fixed above the center of gravity of the weight applied to the first base 475. Even if the first base 475 is fixed only at its upper part even if it swings to the left and right around the contact surface 474, the first base 475 is in a good condition even if the first base 475 is fixed only at its upper part. It can be fixed with. That is, the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 can be satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board base 212.

  Next, the first elevating member 470 of the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 includes a rod-like support shaft 530 on which the first decorative movable body 430 is attached and supported, and two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530. The two support bushes 532 inserted into the guide rail 471 and the two support bushes 532 having the insertion holes 533 through which the guide rail 471 can be inserted and positioned through the guide rail 471 are positioned at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. In addition, a main body 534 capable of positioning the two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and a rear side of the main body 534 and cooperating with the main body 534 The positions of the two support bushes 532 inserted through the guide rail 471 and the two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 And a bushing fixing member 535 for fixing.

  The main body portion 534 of the first elevating member 470 is formed with a stepped recess 536 into which the support bush 532 inserted into the guide rail 471 can be fitted at both ends of the insertion hole 533 and the insertion hole 533. The inner diameter is a diameter at which the guide rail 471 does not contact, and a clearance of a predetermined dimension is formed between the insertion hole 533 and the guide rail 471. In addition, a semi-cylindrical fitting recess 537 in which two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 can be fitted is formed on the main body 534 so as to face each other at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. At the same time, a semi-cylindrical housing portion 538 is formed between the two fitting recesses 537 facing each other, so that the support shaft 530 inserted and supported by the support bush 531 does not come into contact with the main body portion 534. Yes.

  On the other hand, the bush fixing member 535 of the first elevating member 470 is formed with two retaining pieces 539 that are substantially U-shaped in plan view and extend forward, and the distance between these retaining pieces 539 is the main body portion 534. The support bush fitted to the stepped recess 536 of the insertion hole 533 by the two retaining pieces 539 by assembling the bush fixing member 535 to the main body portion 534. The 532 is prevented from coming out of the stepped recess 536.

  Further, the bush fixing member 535 has a semi-cylindrical fitting in which two support bushes 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the two fitting recesses 537 of the main body portion 534 on the front side. A joint recess 540 is formed, and a semi-cylindrical housing portion 541 is formed between the two fitting recesses 540. The bushing fixing member 535 is assembled and fixed to the main body portion 534 by fitting the supporting bushing 531 inserted through the support shaft 530 into the fitting concave portion 540 of the bush fixing member 535 and the fitting concave portion 537 of the main body portion 534. As a result, the two support bushes 531 are fixedly supported at positions separated by a predetermined distance. Further, the housing 538 of the main body 534 and the housing 541 of the bush fixing member 535 form a clearance having a predetermined dimension between the two support bushes 531 and the support shaft 530.

  Further, the bush fixing member 535 is formed with an extension portion 542 on the rear side thereof, which has a groove extending downward from the lower retaining piece 539 and extending in the vertical direction. The extending portion 542 holds a plurality of wiring cords connected to the light emitting substrate 457 of the first decorative movable body 430.

  As described above, by assembling the bush fixing member 535 to the main body portion 534, the support bushes 531 and 532 are fixed and supported at predetermined positions, and the guide rail 471 is provided by the two support bushes 532 and the support bush 531, respectively. The support shaft 531 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable and slidable in the axial direction thereof. The length of the insertion hole 533 of the main body portion 534 is the maximum length that does not interfere with the other members of the first elevating member 470 guided by the guide rail 471. The distance of the support bush 532 can be made as long as possible, and the backlash of the first elevating member 470 with respect to the guide rail 471 can be reduced.

  In the first elevating member 470 of this example, a first decorative movable body solenoid 551 having a plunger 550 attached to the main body 534 and capable of moving back and forth in the front-rear direction, and one end of the plunger 550 in the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 are at one end. And a rotation transmission member 553 that is fixed to the support shaft 531 so as to be integrally rotatable. The first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is disposed below the support shaft 530 at a position where the support shaft 530 and the plunger 550 intersect with each other, and the plunger 550 is advanced and retracted via the rotation transmission member 553. The support shaft 530 can be rotated around the axis within a predetermined angle range. The main body 534 and the bush fixing member 535 are each formed with an accommodation recess 554 that can accommodate a part of the rotation transmission member 553, and the rotation transmission member 553 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 554. Thus, the movement of the rotation transmission member 553 in the left-right direction can be restricted, that is, the movement of the support shaft 530 in the left-right direction (its axial direction) is restricted, and the support shaft 530 is the main body. The support bush 531 fixedly supported by the portion 534 and the bush fixing member 535 is prevented from coming off.

  A belt fixing portion 481 for fixing the drive belt 480 is attached to the main body portion 534 of the first elevating member 470 on the front side of the insertion hole 533, and an attachment portion to which the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is attached. A guide member 492 of the first rotation preventing means 490 is attached to the lower side of 555. Reference numeral 556 in the drawing is a decorative body attached to the front side of the main body 534.

  The first elevating member 470 is provided with a position detection piece 557 on the rear side of the bush fixing member 535. The position detecting piece 557 is detected by a first decorative movable body position detection sensor 558 attached to a predetermined position of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. In this example, the first elevating member 470 is disposed at the upper end. Is detected by the first decorative movable body position detection sensor 558.

  As shown in the figure, the first elevating member 470 supports the first decorative movable body 430 by extending a support shaft 530 greatly to the left side of the insertion hole 533 through which the guide rail 471 is inserted, and at the right side of the insertion hole 533. The first decorative movable body solenoid 551 is disposed on the first through-hole 533 so that the unbalance of the left and right weight balance of the first elevating member 470 is reduced, and the guide rail 471 and the support bush 532 are provided. It suppresses uneven wear.

  Next, the unit decoration body 451 of the first decoration movable body unit 431 is attached to the left side surface of the first decoration movable body drive unit 450, as shown in the figure, and guide rails 471 of the first decoration movable body drive unit 450, The driven pulley 479, the drive belt 480, the tension mechanism 493, and the like are covered so that it is difficult to see from the front side of the game board 5, and the first decorative movable body unit 431 is decorated by decoration on the surface. A support shaft 530 extending from the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 can pass through the unit decorative body 451, and an opening 570 extending in the vertical direction so that the support shaft 530 can move in the vertical direction. It has.

  The first decorative movable body unit 431 of the present example can move the first elevating member 470, that is, the first decorative movable body 430 in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the first drive motor 477, and also the first decorative movable body unit 431. The first decorative movable body 430 can be rotated in the front-rear direction by the movable body solenoid 551.

  Subsequently, the second decorative movable body unit 433 of the rear decorative body 216 is configured to move the second decorative movable body 432 in the up-down direction, and the second decorative movable body 432, which is a model of the lower jaw portion of a predetermined character of the first decorative movable body 430. A second decorative movable body drive unit 610 that is moved and rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction of the game board 5 and attached to the rear surface side of the game board base 212 and attached to the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 And a unit decoration body 611 for decoration.

  The second decorative movable body 432 of the second decorative movable body unit 433 is arranged in the second decorative movable body main body 612 in which the lips and lower teeth of a predetermined character are formed, and in the jaw of the second decorative movable body main body 612. And a tongue member 613 that is shaped as a tongue of a predetermined character and has translucency, and is disposed between the tongue member 613 and the second decorative movable body main body 612 so as to emit light toward the tongue member 613. A light emitting substrate 615 having a plurality of LEDs 614, and a lens unit 616 disposed between the light emitting substrate 615 and the tongue member 613, supported by the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, and diffusing light from the light emitting substrate 615. And a base member 617 having.

  The second decorative movable body 432 is configured such that the tongue member 613 shines when the LED 614 of the light emitting substrate 615 emits light.

  Further, the second decorative movable body 432 is provided with a fixing portion 618 for fixing and supporting the second decorative movable body driving unit 610 on the base member 617, and the second decorative movable body is provided by the fixing portion 618. 432 is supported by the second decorative movable body drive unit 610.

  Next, the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 supports the second decorative movable body 432, and moves the second decorative movable body 432 up and down together with the second decorative movable body 432, and the second vertical movable member 630 in the vertical direction. A guide rail 631 for guiding, a second upper support member 632 for supporting the upper end portion of the guide rail 631, a second lower support member 633 for supporting the lower end portion of the guide rail 631, a second upper support member 632, and a second A second base 635 that supports the lower support member 633 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and has a mounting contact surface 634 that contacts the rear side of the game board base 212 and is formed by bending a sheet metal; A second drive motor 637 disposed on the opposite side of the second upper support member 632 and penetrating through the second base 635 and the second upper support member 632 and projecting a rotating drive shaft 636; A drive pulley 638 that rotates as the drive shaft 636 of the second drive motor 637 rotates, a driven pulley 639 that is disposed in the vicinity of the second lower support member 633 so as to be paired with the drive pulley 638, and a drive pulley 638 And the driven pulley 639, and a belt fixing portion 641 for connecting and fixing a part of the driving belt 640 to the second elevating member 630.

  In this example, the rotation of the drive pulley 638 by the second drive motor 637 is arranged so that the rotation of the drive gear 642 fixed to the drive shaft 636 of the second drive motor 637 is substantially below the drive gear 642. The drive pulley 638 is driven to rotate by being transmitted to a transmission gear 643 that meshes with the drive gear 642 and rotates integrally with the drive pulley 638. In addition, engagement teeth 644 are provided on the inner peripheral surface of the drive belt 640 at predetermined intervals over the entire circumference, and the engaged teeth 645 that engage with the engagement teeth 644 are provided on the drive pulley 638 as gears. The rotational drive of the drive pulley 638 is reliably transmitted to the drive belt 640 by the engagement of the engaged teeth 645 and the engagement teeth 644. The driven pulley 639 is a flat pulley without engaged teeth.

  The second decorative movable body drive unit 610 is further provided with second rotation preventing means 650 for preventing the second elevating member 630 from rotating around the axial direction in which the guide rail 631 extends. The second anti-rotation means 650 includes a guide rod 651 that is supported at the upper and lower ends thereof by the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 and arranged substantially parallel to the guide rail 631, and from the left-right direction. And a guide member 652 that can be brought into contact with the guide rod 651 and attached to the second elevating member 630. As shown in the figure, the second rotation preventing means 650 includes a guide rod 651 disposed on the rear side of the guide rail 631 at a predetermined distance and a guide member 652 having a substantially U-shaped cross section. By abutting on either of the left and right sides of 651, the second elevating member 630 can be well prevented from rotating around the axis of the guide rail 631.

  In this example, the guide rail 631 and the guide rod 651 are both metal round bars, and a friction reducing layer for reducing sliding resistance is formed on the surface of the guide rail 631. The friction reducing layer is coated with, for example, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE, (for example, Teflon (registered trademark))) as a fluororesin with a predetermined thickness, and is thereby guided by the guide rail 631. The value of the dynamic frictional resistance and the value of the static frictional resistance of the second elevating member 630 can be brought as close as possible, and when the stationary second elevating member 630 starts moving, the movement can be started smoothly, The durability of the guide rail 631 and the like can be reduced by reducing wear. Further, the surface of the guide rod 651 is chrome-plated to prevent corrosion such as rust and improve durability, and it is less expensive than the guide rail 631 and prevents an increase in cost. It can be done.

  The second decorative movable body drive unit 610 further includes a tension mechanism 653 that applies a predetermined tension to the drive belt 640. The tension mechanism 653 is the same mechanism as the tension mechanism 493 provided in the first decorative movable body drive unit 450. The tension mechanism 653 is guided by the guide rail 631 and rotatably supports the driven pulley 639, and one end. The movable body 654 includes a tension spring 655 that is attached to the second base 635 at the other end and biases the movable body 654 downward.

  The moving body 654 of the tension mechanism 653 includes a guide hole 656 that passes through the guide rail 631, a hook-shaped locking portion 658 that locks the shaft portion 657 that opens downward and protrudes from both ends of the driven pulley 639, and a guide. A spring mounting portion 659 is provided between the hole 656 and the locking portion 658 and to which one end of the tension spring 655 is attached. Accordingly, the driven pulley 639 can be supported by the moving body 654 in a state where the drive belt 640 is wound around the driven pulley 639, so that the assembly can be easily performed. Further, since the drive belt 640 is pulled by the tension spring 655 between the guide hole 656 and the locking portion 658 for locking the shaft portion 657 of the driven pulley 639, the guide hole is guided with respect to the shaft of the guide rail 631. The shaft of 656 can be prevented from being greatly inclined, the sliding resistance of the moving body 654 in the guide rail 631 is prevented from increasing, and the moving body 654 can move smoothly, and the moving body The posture of 654 is prevented from changing greatly, and the drive belt 480 is tensioned satisfactorily.

  In the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, as shown in the figure, the drive pulley 638 is disposed on the upper side and the driven pulley 639 is disposed on the lower side, and the drive wound around the drive pulley 638 and the driven pulley 639 is driven. The belt 640 is biased downward by a tension mechanism 653 via a driven pulley 639. Further, since the second elevating member 630 is fixed to the driving belt 640, the weights of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 are applied to the driving belt 640 and pulled downward only to one side of the driving belt 640. A force is applied, and the driving belt 640 is strongly wound around the driving pulley 638 by the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432.

  On the other hand, the upper drive pulley 638 is provided with engaged teeth 645 that engage with the engagement teeth 644 of the drive belt 640, and the drive belt depends on the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432. By strongly winding the drive pulley 638 around the drive pulley 638, the engagement between the engagement tooth 644 of the drive belt 640 and the engaged tooth 645 of the drive pulley 638 becomes stronger, and the drive pulley 638 of the drive pulley 638 is driven by the second drive motor 637. By blocking the rotation, the rotation of the drive belt 640 is blocked, and the weights of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 are supported by the drive pulley 638 via the drive belt 640, and the second The weight of the elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 is not applied to the lower driven pulley 639 or the tension mechanism 653. As a result, the second elevating member 630 and the like can be moved up and down satisfactorily without applying an extra load to the tension mechanism 653, and the cost required for the tension mechanism 653 and the like with a minimum biasing force by the tension mechanism 653 can be achieved. Can be reduced.

  By the way, when the vertical arrangement of the driving pulley 638, the driven pulley 639, and the tension mechanism 653 is reversed, the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 is applied to the driven pulley 639 via the driving belt 640. The driven pulley 639 is not provided with an engaged tooth 645 that engages with the engaging tooth 644 of the drive belt 640, and the driven pulley 639 is configured to freely rotate. The weights of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 cannot be supported, and the second elevating member 630 descends and the drive belt 640 rotates in a predetermined direction. Further, since the drive belt 640 is pulled downward by the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 in the lower drive pulley 638, the winding force of the drive belt 640 on the drive pulley 638 is weakened. In other words, the engagement between the engagement teeth 644 of the drive belt 640 and the engaged teeth 645 of the drive pulley 638 is weakened, making it easier to slip on each other.

  When slippage occurs between the drive pulley 638 and the drive belt 640, the drive belt 64 is rotated by the weight of the second elevating member 630 and the second decorative movable body 432 regardless of the rotation of the second drive motor 637. As a result, the second elevating member 630 is lowered, and the second elevating member 630 cannot be moved up and down satisfactorily. Therefore, it is conceivable to prevent slippage between the drive pulley 638 and the drive belt 640 by increasing the urging force of the tension mechanism 653. However, when the urging force is increased, not only the tension mechanism 653 but also the drive pulley 638, It is necessary to increase the strength of the driven pulley 639, the driving belt 640, the second base 635, and the like, which causes a problem of increasing the cost of the second decorative movable body driving unit 433. It is desirable to arrange the pulley 638 on the upper side and the driven pulley 639 on the lower side.

  In the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 of this example, a positioning hole 670 for positioning the mounting positions of the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 is formed in the second base 635. In addition, positioning protrusions 671 that fit into the positioning holes 670 are respectively formed on the contact portions of the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 with the second base 635. As a result, the positioning projections 671 of the corresponding second upper support member 632 and second lower support member 633 are fitted into the positioning holes 670 of the second base 635 and then fixed to the second base 635. Thus, the second upper support member 632 and the second lower support member 633 can be accurately positioned at predetermined positions, and the assembly accuracy of the guide rail 631, the drive pulley 638, the driven pulley 639, etc. can be assembled with high accuracy and ease. It is supposed to be. A mounting hole 672 for mounting and fixing to the game board base 212 is formed in the mounting contact surface 634 of the second base 635.

  In the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, as shown in the figure, the mounting contact surface 634 of the second base 635 is provided on the upper portion of the second base 635, Only the upper part of the two bases 635 is attached and fixed. Thereby, the attachment location to the game board base 212 can be decreased, and an assembly cost can be reduced. Further, the second base 635 is fixed to the game board base 212 at the upper part, that is, fixed above the center of gravity of the weight applied to the second base 635. Even if it swings left and right around the contact surface 634, it tends to return to its original position due to the gravity applied to its center of gravity. Therefore, even if the second base 635 is fixed only at its upper part, the second base 635 is excellent. It can be fixed in the state. That is, the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 can be satisfactorily attached and fixed to the game board base 212.

  Next, the second elevating member 630 of the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 includes a rod-shaped support shaft 690 on which the second decorative movable body 432 is attached and supported, and two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690. The two support bushes 692 inserted into the guide rail 631 and the two support bushes 692 having the insertion holes 693 through which the guide rail 631 can be inserted and positioned through the guide rail are positioned at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. The two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 can be positioned at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the main body 694 is disposed on the rear side of the main body 694 and guided in cooperation with the main body 694. The positions of the two support bushes 692 inserted through the rail 631 and the two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 are fixed. That and a bushing fixing member 695.

  The main body portion 694 of the second elevating member 630 has stepped recesses 696 into which the support bushes 692 inserted into the guide rails 631 can be fitted at both ends of the insertion holes 693. The inner diameter is a diameter at which the guide rail 631 does not contact, and a clearance of a predetermined dimension is formed between the insertion hole 693 and the guide rail 631. In addition, a semi-cylindrical fitting recess 697 capable of fitting two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 is formed on the main body 694 so as to face each other at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. At the same time, a semi-cylindrical housing portion 698 is formed between two opposing fitting recesses 697 so that the support shaft 690 inserted and supported by the support bush 691 does not come into contact with the main body portion 694. Yes.

  On the other hand, the bush fixing member 695 of the second elevating member 630 has two retaining pieces 699 that are substantially U-shaped in plan view and that extend forward, and the distance between these retaining pieces 699 is the main body 694. The support bush fitted to the stepped recess 696 of the insertion hole 693 by the two retaining pieces 699 by assembling the bush fixing member 695 to the main body 694. 692 is prevented from coming out of the stepped recess 696.

  Further, the bush fixing member 695 is fitted in a semi-cylindrical shape capable of fitting two support bushes 691 inserted through the support shaft 690 at positions corresponding to the two fitting recesses 697 of the main body 694 on the front side. A joint recess 700 is formed, and a semi-cylindrical housing portion 701 is formed between the two fitting recesses 700. The bushing fixing member 695 is assembled and fixed to the main body part 694 after the supporting bushing 691 inserted through the supporting shaft 690 is fitted into the fitting concave part 700 of the bushing fixing member 695 and the fitting concave part 697 of the main body part 694. By doing so, the two support bushes 691 are fixedly supported at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. Further, the housing portion 698 of the main body 694 and the housing portion 701 of the bush fixing member 695 form a clearance of a predetermined dimension between the two support bushes 691 and the support shaft 690.

  As described above, by assembling the bush fixing member 695 to the main body 694, the support bushes 692 and 691 are fixedly supported at predetermined positions, and the guide rail 631 is supported by the two support bushes 692 and the support bushes 691, respectively. The support shaft 690 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable and slidable in the axial direction thereof. The length of the insertion hole 693 of the main body 694 is the maximum length that does not interfere with the other members of the second elevating member 630 guided by the guide rail 631. The distance of the support bush 692 can be made as long as possible, and the backlash of the second elevating member 630 with respect to the guide rail 631 can be reduced.

  The second elevating member 630 of this example includes a second decorative movable body solenoid 711 having a plunger 710 attached to the bush fixing member 695 and capable of moving back and forth in the vertical direction, and the forward and backward movement of the plunger 710 in the second decorative movable body solenoid 711. And a link mechanism 712 for rotating the support shaft 690. The second decorative movable body solenoid 711 has a flange 713 formed at the tip of the plunger 710 and a spring 714 that urges the plunger 710 in the forward direction. In this example, the plunger 710 The second decorative movable body solenoid 711 moves forward and backward from the lower side.

  The link mechanism 712 is disposed so as to extend in the front-rear direction, one end side (rear side) is rotatably supported by the bush fixing member 695, and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is provided between the one end side and the other end side. The first flange member 717 has a locking portion 715 that locks the flange portion 713 at the tip of the plunger 710 and a connecting portion 716 that is a long hole on the other end side, and the connecting portion 716 of the first flange member 717. And a second flange member 719 fixed to the support shaft 690 at the other end. One end of the first flange member 717 is pivotally supported by the bush fixing member 695 at a position further rearward than the plunger 710 of the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 disposed on the rear side of the support shaft 690. The other end side is disposed in front of the support shaft 690. Note that the second shaft member 719 of the link mechanism 712 is fixed to the end portion of the support shaft 690 so that the support shaft 690 is prevented from moving in the axial direction so that it does not come out of the support bush 691.

  In the second decorative movable body unit 433, when the plunger 710 of the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is advanced (projected) by the link mechanism 712, the second decorative movable body 432 is connected via the link mechanism 712 and the support shaft 690. When the distal end (front side) is turned up and the plunger 710 is retracted (immersed), the second decorative movable body is turned down via the link mechanism 712 and the support shaft 690. Yes.

  A belt fixing portion 641 for fixing the drive belt 640 is attached to the main body 694 of the second elevating member 630 on the front side of the insertion hole 693, and a bush fixing member 695 is provided on the rear side of the insertion hole 693. A guide member 652 of the second rotation preventing means 650 is attached with being sandwiched. Reference numeral 730 in the figure denotes a decorative body attached to the front side of the main body 694.

  Further, the second elevating member 630 is provided with a position detection piece 731 on the left side of the bush fixing member 695 when viewed from the front, and the position detection piece 731 can be detected at a predetermined position of the second lower support member 633. A second decorative movable body position detection sensor 732 is attached. In this example, when the second elevating member 630 is positioned at the lower end, the position detecting piece 731 of the second elevating member 630 is detected by the second decorative movable body position detection sensor 732.

  As shown in the figure, the second elevating member 630 supports the second decorative movable body 432 by extending a support shaft 690 greatly on the right side of the insertion hole 693 through which the guide rail 631 is inserted, and the insertion hole 693. The second decorative movable body solenoid 711 is disposed on the left side of the first and second guide members 631 and the support bush so as to reduce the imbalance between the left and right weight balances of the second elevating member 630 with the insertion hole 693 interposed therebetween. 692 is prevented from being unevenly worn.

  Next, the unit decoration body 611 of the second decoration movable body unit 433 is attached to the right side surface of the second decoration movable body drive unit 610 as shown in the figure, and the guide rail of the second decoration movable body drive unit 610 is shown. 631, the driving pulley 638, the driven pulley 639, the driving belt 640, the tension mechanism 653, and the like are covered so that it is difficult to see from the front side of the game board 5, and the second decorative movable body unit 433 is covered by the surface decoration. It is something to decorate. A support shaft 690 extending from the second decorative movable body drive unit 610 can pass through the unit decorative body 611, and an opening 733 extending in the vertical direction so that the support shaft 590 can move in the vertical direction. It has.

  The second decorative movable body unit 433 of this example can move the second elevating member 630, that is, the second decorative movable body 432 in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the second drive motor 637, and the second decorative movable body unit 433. The tip of the second decorative movable body 432 can be rotated in the vertical direction by the movable body solenoid 711.

  Subsequently, the decorative movable body unit cover 435 is provided with a plurality of attachment portions 750 for attaching and fixing the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433, and each of the attachment portions 750 includes screws. It consists of a hole and a positioning boss. On the other hand, screw insertion holes and positioning holes are formed at corresponding positions of the first base 475 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second base 635 of the second decorative movable body unit 433, respectively. By fitting the positioning boss of the part 750 into the corresponding positioning hole of the first base 475 or the second base 635, the screw hole of the mounting part 750 and the screw insertion hole of the first base 475 or the second base 635 The screw is screwed into the screw hole from the front side so as to pass through the screw insertion hole of the first base 475 or the second base 635, so that the first position is set at a predetermined position of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. The decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are attached.

  In addition, the decorative movable body unit cover 435 is formed with a plurality of contact surfaces 752 that contact the rear surface of the game board base 212 and have screw holes 751 through which screws can be inserted. The abutment movable body unit cover 435 is screwed into the game board base 212 via a screw hole 751 from the rear side of the abutment surface 752 by abutting against the rear surface of the board base 212 and the game board base 212. It can be mounted on.

  Note that the decorative movable body unit cover 435 of this example is attached to the first base 475 and the second base 635 in the state where the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are attached. The mounting holes 512 and 672 of 474 and 634 are positioned outside the outer periphery of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. Thus, the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are attached to the decorative movable body unit cover 435, and the mounting holes 512 and 672 of the first base 475 and the second base 635 are attached. The game board base 212 is directly attached to the rear surface side of the game board 212 with screws (not shown).

  Further, the decorative movable body unit cover 435 is provided with wiring holding means 770 at predetermined positions facing the rear sides of the first decorative movable body drive unit 450 and the second decorative movable body drive unit 610, respectively. The wiring holding means 770 is a wiring fixed at a predetermined position of a plurality of wiring cords 771 connected to the light emitting substrate 457 supported by the first lifting member 470 and the light emitting substrate 615 supported by the second lifting member 630. When the first elevating member 470 and the second elevating member 630 are moved up and down while holding the band 772, the wiring cord 771 connected to the light emitting substrates 457 and 615 is not entangled or caught between other members. It is for doing so.

  Specifically, the wiring holding means 770 is provided adjacent to a connector passage portion 773 including a through hole through which a connection connector attached to an end portion (tip portion) of the wiring cord 771 can pass, and a connector passage portion 733. The first passing portion 774 in which the wiring band 772 fixed to the wiring cord 771 is not allowed to pass and only the wiring cord 771 is allowed to pass therethrough is provided adjacent to the first passing portion 774 and is fixed to the wiring cord 771. The wiring band 772 is configured to include a second passage portion 775 that cannot pass through and only the wiring cord 771 can pass therethrough. The first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion 775 are formed in an elongated slit shape and are disposed so as to be substantially parallel to each other.

  The wiring holding means 770 communicates with the first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion 775, and the communication portion 776 that allows the wiring cord 771 to pass therethrough. The first passage portion faces the communication portion 776. 774 and a second passage 775, and further includes a protrusion 777 that protrudes in a direction substantially perpendicular to the opening surfaces of the first passage 774 and the second passage 775. In this example, the communication portion 776 is sized to allow the wiring band 772 fixed to the wiring cord 771 to pass therethrough, and the protrusions 777 are on both the front and rear sides of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. Are provided so as to protrude from each other.

  The wiring holding means 770 is configured to connect a wiring cord 771 having a wiring band 772 fixed at a predetermined position from the front side where the first decorative movable body unit 431 and the second decorative movable body unit 433 are arranged to the rear side. It is inserted so as to pass through the passage portion 773. Subsequently, the proximal end side of the wiring cord 771 of the inserted wiring cord 771 is passed from the rear side to the front side of the decorative movable body unit cover 435 through the communication portion 776 to the first passage portion 774, and further the wiring band. The distal end side of 772 is passed through the second passage portion 775 through the communication portion 776 in the same manner from the front side to the rear side of the decorative movable body unit cover 435. Then, the wiring band 772 fixed to the wiring cord 771 is brought into contact with the opening of the first passage portion 774 (contacts with the front side of the decorative movable body unit cover 435), and the first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion. By preventing the wiring cord 771 from slackening with respect to the terminal 775, even if the wiring cord 771 is pulled from its proximal end side, it can be held so that the distal end side does not move from the wiring band 772. .

  Since the wiring holding means 770 is provided with the protruding portion 777, even if the wiring cord 771 moves along the slit-like first passing portion 774 and the second passing portion 775, the protruding portion 777 Since the movement is restricted, it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 771 from being detached from the first passage portion 774 and the second passage portion 775 via the communication portion 776.

[Functional Configuration of Main Substrate and Peripheral Substrate] A description will be given based on FIG. 53 and FIG.
53 and 54 are block diagrams schematically showing the control configuration. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate the connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate the connection and direction of the signal. The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is broadly divided into a group of main boards 810 (shown in FIG. 53) and a group of peripheral boards 811 (shown in FIG. 54). The group controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 811 performs staging operations (light emitting decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, decoration body operation, etc.) ) Is controlling.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main board 810 includes a main control board 94 and a payout control board 133. The main control board 94 includes a CPU 812 as a central processing unit, a ROM 813 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 814 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 812 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 813, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 811 or the payout control board 133. The RAM 814 temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 94 and information such as input signals. The main board 810 is connected to the power supply board 131 via the power supply relay terminal plate 860, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 131.

  The input interface of the main control board 94 includes a first start port sensor 416 that detects a winning state at the first start port 330 and a second start port sensor 358 that detects a winning state at the second start port 332. An all winning opening winning number counting sensor 870 is connected to count the number of winning with respect to the winning opening. In addition, a gate sensor 990 that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate via the panel relay terminal plate 866, and a right general prize port sensor that detects that a game ball has won the right general prize port 336. 417a is connected to a left general winning opening sensor 417b that detects that a game ball has been won in the left general winning opening 336, and further via a large winning opening relay terminal plate 867 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 866. A big prize opening sensor 370 is connected. Detection signals are input to the main control board 94 from these sensors. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 94 are an inner frame opening switch 862 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 863 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 869 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 866 via a symbol limiting resistor board 868. The normal symbol display 928 (FIG. 77) is connected to the main control board 94. Reference) and a special symbol display 390 can output a drive signal. Further, an attacker solenoid 372 for driving the attacker device 335 and a starter solenoid 352 for driving the movable piece 331 are connected to the output interface of the special winning opening relay terminal plate 867. From the main control board 94, these are connected. A drive signal is output.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 133 includes a CPU 815 as a central processing unit, a ROM 816 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 817 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 133 processes the command signal input from the main control board 94 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 125 and the launch motor 128 connected to the launch control board 865. Thereby, the ball payout device 125 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 128 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal. Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 94 and the payout control board 133 via the respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 94 transmits a prize ball command, in response to this An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 133 to the main control board 94. The payout control board 133 is also connected with a lower tray full tank switch 864 that detects that the game balls stored in the lower tray 31 are full. “Notice of removal from the dish 31” is notified.

  In addition, an external terminal board 861 is connected to the main control board 94 and the payout control board 133, and the winning state to the start openings 330 and 332 and the big winning opening 333, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the lottery Various information such as a gaming state based on the result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 811 includes a sub-integrated substrate 830 and a liquid crystal control substrate 832 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 94 and the sub-integrated board 830. The command is sent to but not the other way around. In addition, power for operation is supplied from the power supply board 131 to the peripheral board 811 via the power supply relay terminal plate 860.

  The sub-integrated board 830 also has electronic components such as a CPU 834, a ROM 835, and a RAM 836, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. In addition, the sub-integrated board 830 is provided with a ROM 883 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 882 that outputs sound and music according to the contents of the production based on the sound source stored in the ROM 883. It has been. Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the sub-integrated board 830 and the liquid crystal control board 832 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 217 is connected to the liquid crystal control board 832, and the liquid crystal control board 832 processes a command signal transmitted from the sub-integrated board 830, thereby producing the effect display device. A drive signal is output to 217. More specifically, the liquid crystal control board 832 includes a CPU 851, a RAM 857, a ROM 854, a VDP 884, and an image ROM 885. The CPU 851 receives the command signal sent from the sub-integrated board 830 via the input interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 884. The RAM 857 provides a work area for the CPU 851 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 854 holds a program for the CPU 851 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 884 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 217. A register is provided in the VDP 884 so that the operation mode of the VDP 884, setting information of various display functions, and the like can be held. Then, the CPU 851 rewrites various information held in this register, whereby the display mode in the effect display device 217 can be changed variously. The image ROM 885 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  In addition, an electrical decoration control board 831 and a frame decoration relay terminal plate 886 are connected to the sub-integrated board 830, and the electrical decoration control board 831 corresponds to the first decorative movable body 430 as a relay terminal board. A face unit relay terminal plate 887, a lower jaw unit relay terminal plate 888 corresponding to the second movable decorative body 432, a center decorative driving unit relay terminal plate 889 corresponding to the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235, Each is connected. A first decorative movable body position detection sensor 558 for detecting the position of the first decorative movable body 430 is connected to the input interface of the face unit relay terminal board 887, and the first decorative movable body is connected to the output interface. A face unit decoration lamp 456a (LED 346) provided at 430 and a first decoration movable body solenoid 551 for rotating the first decoration movable body 430 are connected. Note that the first drive motor 477 that moves the first decorative movable body 430 up and down is directly connected to the output interface of the electrical decoration control board 831 without going through the face unit relay terminal board 887. Further, a second decorative movable body position detection sensor 732 for detecting the position of the second movable decorative body 432 is connected to the input interface of the lower jaw unit relay terminal board 888, and the second movable decorative body 432 is provided to the output interface. The lower jaw unit decoration lamp 614 a (LED 614) and the second decoration movable body solenoid 711 for rotating the second movable decoration body 432 are connected. The second drive motor 637 that raises and lowers the second movable decorative body 432 is directly connected to the output interface of the electrical decoration control board 831 without going through the lower jaw unit relay terminal plate 888.

  A left decoration motor sensor 319a for detecting the position of the left movable decoration body 235 and a right decoration motor sensor 319b for detecting the position of the right movable decoration body 234 are connected to the input interface of the center decoration drive unit relay terminal board 889. The output interfaces are connected to LEDs 293 (left decorative lamp 293a and right decorative lamp 293b) built in the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235, respectively. The center decoration left drive motor 310a and the center decoration right drive motor 310b that rotate the right movable decoration body 234 and the left movable decoration body 235 are arranged on the electrical control board 831 without the center decoration drive unit relay terminal plate 889. Connected directly to the output interface. In addition, a panel decoration lamp 890 and a center decoration lamp 891 are also connected to the output interface of the lighting control board 831, and the lighting control board 831 can switch the lighting state of these lamps. The frame decoration relay terminal board 886 connected to the sub-integrated board 830 is connected to the speakers 18 and 57 attached to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 892, the frame decoration lamp 893, and the like. The board 830 switches the effect mode output to the effect display device 217 based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 892, and outputs a drive signal to the speakers 18, 57 and the frame decoration lamp 893.

[Operations of the main character and the post-decorating body] A description will be given based on FIGS. 55 to 57.
FIG. 55 is a front view of the game area showing a state in which the movable decorative body in the main character is rotated in a substantially vertical direction. FIG. 56 is a front view of the game area showing a state in which the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of the rear decorative body are further moved from the state of FIG. FIG. 57 is a front view of the game area showing a state in which the first decorative movable body and the second decorative movable body of the rear decorative body are moved.

  First, in the electrical control board 831, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or reset, the detection signals of the left and right rotational position detection sensors 319 that detect the rotational positions of the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are detected. If the presence or absence of reception is confirmed and there is no detection signal from the rotational position detection sensor 319, the left and right movable decorative body drive motors 310 are moved in directions such that the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are in a horizontal state. When the rotational drive is performed and a detection signal is received from each rotational position detection sensor 319, the rotation of the movable decorative body drive motor 310 is stopped. As a result, the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are in a substantially horizontal state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined control command for driving and controlling the movable decorative bodies 234 and 235 is transmitted from the sub-integrated board 830 to the electric decoration control board 831 in accordance with the change in the gaming state, the electric decoration control board 831 is movable. The decorative body drive motor 310 is rotationally driven to rotate the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 so as to be in a vertical state as shown in FIG. As shown in the drawing, in this state, a part of the first decorative movable body 430 of the rear decorative body 216 can be seen below the upper edge of the frame-shaped decorative body 230 in the main character 213.

  Depending on the control command from the sub-integrated board 830, the movable decorative body drive motor 310 can be driven so as to vibrate vibrate by repeating the normal rotation and reverse rotation in a short cycle. It has become.

  In this state, when a predetermined control command for driving and controlling the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 of the rear decorative body 216 is transmitted from the sub-integrated board 830 to the electrical decoration control board 831, the electrical decoration In the control board 831, the first drive motor 477 and the second drive motor 637 are rotationally driven in the direction in which the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 432 approach each other, and the first display motor 217 is placed on the front surface of the effect display device 217. It moves so that the decoration movable body 430 and the 2nd decoration movable body 431 may be located (refer FIG. 56). The first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 431 are driven so as to approach or separate from each other as appropriate in accordance with a control command from the sub-integrated board 830, and the first decorative movable body. The mouth of a predetermined character expressed by the body 430 and the second decorative movable body 431 can be operated to open and close.

  In addition, in response to a control command from the sub-integrated board 830, the electrical decoration control board 831 drives the first decorative movable body solenoid 551 and the second decorative movable body solenoid 711 so that the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 430 are driven. By rotating the decorative movable body 431 around an axis extending in the left-right direction, the first decorative movable body 430 rotates its face back and forth, and the second decorative movable body 432 rotates its lower jaw back and forth. The movement of the character's mouth is made more realistic.

  As shown in FIG. 56, since the left and right ends of the first decorative movable body 430 moved downward are blocked by the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235, the first decorative movable body 430 is as if it is in the air. You can make it look like it ’s floating. In the second decorative movable body 430, the support shaft 690 that supports the second decorative movable body 432 is concealed by the decorative body 730 attached to the second elevating member 630 of the second decorative movable body unit 433.

  Also, depending on the control command from the sub-integrated board 830, only the first decorative movable body 430 and the second decorative movable body 431 can be driven as shown in FIG. The support shaft 530 that supports the first decorative movable body 430 is concealed by the decorative body 556 attached to the first elevating member 470 of the first decorative movable body unit 431 provided with the first decorative movable body 430. The design is improved by improving the appearance.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 94 (particularly the CPU 812) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94, and FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing an example of a process when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display pattern setting process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the CPU 812 executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 814 is normal (a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 814 is used. Executes processing to restore the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM 814 and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings: interrupt timing settings, etc.) . If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored in the RAM 814 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM 814 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If no backup data is stored in the RAM 814 mounted on the main control board 94 during the power-on process, the RAM 814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 94 is activated to the sub-integrated board 830 when normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the sub integrated board 830 that the main control board 94 is activated. Note that the backup data is also stored in the RAM 814 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed or the like, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power supply Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process ends, the CPU 812 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the CPU 812 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 94 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94 in step S2, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S4). When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In this process, the state at the time of occurrence of a power failure is stored in the RAM 814 as backup data in order to start from the above. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). . The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing an example of the process at the time of power-off occurrence (step S4). As described above, the power-off occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the CPU 812 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 814 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 814 (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 814 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 812 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 814 (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 812 prohibits access to the RAM 814 (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the CPU 812 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop shown in FIG. 58 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 812 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94 during the execution of the main process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 812 executes the process from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout control board 133 to pay out the game ball is set based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the ordinary electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 331 opened and closed by the start opening solenoid 352) is changed. Control is performed to change the open / close state of the second start port 332. In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol indicator 390a and the second special symbol indicator 390 based on the progress of the game. Or a special electric accessory (that is, an open / close door 334 (attacker device 335) opened / closed by the attacker solenoid 372) is controlled to change the open / close state of the special winning opening 333. In the output data setting process of step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a process of outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory lamp (not shown), Etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the sub-integrated board 830 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the sub-integrated board 830 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 812 mounted on the main control board 94 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (including “small hit” described later) (big hit determination), the big hit determination A random number for a big hit symbol used to determine whether or not to make a promiscuous big hit when it is determined that a big hit gaming state is generated in (special change determination), special when a big hit gaming state is determined in the big hit determination Random for jackpot symbol used to determine the symbol to stop the symbol, used to determine whether or not to release with a reach mode when it is determined that the jackpot gaming state does not occur in the jackpot determination (reach determination) Reach determination random number, a special symbol change display pattern displayed on the first special symbol display 390a and the second special symbol display 390b (at the time of change) ) Is used for determining the variable display pattern random number (variable time random number), the normal hit determining random number used for determining whether or not the movable piece 331 is controlled to be open (normal lottery determination), and the like. is there. In this example, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. It is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual) using the jackpot symbol random number. Note that the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the effect display device 217 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per random determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 331 is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether to control the movable piece 331 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 331 is controlled to the open state) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random number and the variable display pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and the normal lottery.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S15). In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, the CPU 812 executes the processes from step S20 to step S90. In the start opening winning process in step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 330 or the second start opening 332, and if the winning is won, a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of starting memories (holding number) in each big hit lottery is confirmed, and if the number of starting memories (total number of starting memories) is not 0, the corresponding special symbol variation display is started. Make settings for As will be described in detail later, specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state is to be generated, and if a big hit gaming state is to be generated, it is determined whether or not to be a promising big hit. In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. More specifically, as will be described later, specifically, a variable display pattern of each special symbol is determined, and a variable time (first special symbol display 390a and second special symbol display) set in correspondence with the variable display pattern. At 390b, the time from when the special symbol variation display is started to when it is stopped is set in the timer.

  In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40) is monitored, and the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display is performed based on the time-out of the timer. Processing to stop the special symbol variation display in the device 390b is performed. At this time, if it is determined in any one of the big win lotteries in the variation start process (step S30), the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small win game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the jackpot game start process in step S60, settings for starting the jackpot game state are performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times the attacker device 335 is opened, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times the attacker device 335 is opened in a small hit, the opening time, etc. are set. In the special electric utility jackpot control process in step S80, the big prize opening 333 is opened, and the attacker device 335 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 333 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process to make it. Further, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, the process for opening the attacker device 335 is performed again. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, a processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed. In the special electric accessory small hit control process in step S90, the big prize opening 333 is opened and the attacker device 335 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 333 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Perform processing to set the status. As will be described in detail later, the opening of the big prize opening 333 in the special electric accessory small hit control process seems to have a very low profit to the player as compared to the special electric bonus hit control process (step S80). Is set to Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the start opening prize process, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 358, and when the detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 358, Then, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 332 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 358 is not output, the game ball has won the second start port 332 (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that a game ball has won at the second starting port 332, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 814. It is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). Then, if the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 358 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 330 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 416. When it is determined in step S205 that a game ball has won the first start opening 330 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are obtained, and the value of the first reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 814 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the upper limit is less than 4 (step S206). If the first held ball number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the processes after step S302 are executed. If it is not “0” (NO in step S301), the variation start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values of the two reserved ball number counters (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 390a and 390b are “0”. . The sum of the values of the two reserved ball counters indicates the number of random numbers stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 940 (see FIG. 79)). If the values of both the held ball number counters are “0” (YES), it is determined that the starting conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the routine proceeds to step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the held ball number counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 79, the special symbol random number storage means 940 is provided with eight storage areas (storage area [1] 940a to storage area [8] 940h). That is, eight storage areas 940a to 940h are provided, which are respectively associated with the value of the total start memory number (“1” to “8”), which is the sum of the first start memory number and the second start memory number. It has been. Each of the storage areas 940a to 940h stores a big hit determination random number storage area 946 for storing a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number storage area 947 for storing a big hit symbol random number, and a special symbol determination flag. And a special symbol determination flag storage area 948. As the special symbol determination flag, “0” indicating that the stored random number is a random number related to the first special symbol (first lottery) and “2” indicating that the random number is related to the second special symbol (second lottery) “ 1 "is set. In the start memory transfer process, first, the symbol to be changed next based on the special symbol determination flag stored in the special symbol determination flag storage region 948 of the storage area [1] 940a is the second special symbol. Whether or not (step S303). If it is not the second special symbol, that is, if it is the first special symbol (NO in step S303), each of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 940b to storage area [8] Various random numbers stored in 940h) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 940a to storage area [7] 940g) (step S304), and storage area [1 ] The process (step S305) which acquires the random number regarding the 1st special symbol memorize | stored in 940a is performed. In addition, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, when the next variable symbol that is determined based on the special symbol determination flag stored in the special symbol determination flag storage region 948 of the storage area [1] 940a is the second special symbol (step S303). As in step S304, various random numbers stored in the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 940b to storage area [8] 940h) are stored in the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [ 1] 940a to storage area [7] 940g) (step S308), and a process of acquiring random numbers related to the second special symbol stored in storage area [1] 940a (step S309). Execute. Further, “2” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S310), and a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S311).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, i.e., a table set with a low probability of jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, i.e., the probability of a big hit is Select a highly set table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal), the probability of a big hit is set to 1 / 315.5, and when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, high). The probability of winning a big hit is set to 1 / 31.55.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 based on the table is a random number corresponding to the big hit (big hit value) It is determined whether or not (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, when the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. (NO in S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the RAM 814. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 63, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “1”. If the process flag is “1” in step S317 (YES in step S401), the process after step S402 is performed. If the process is not “1” (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is “ON”. If the flag is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability variation jackpot or It is determined which of the big hits is a normal big hit (step S403). If it is a big hit with probability fluctuation (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability fluctuation jackpots, “In the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit will be granted is set to a probability fluctuation state higher than normal, and it fluctuates on any special symbol display. When the special symbol to be changed is shortened (relatively shorter than the normal time), and the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332 is increased more than usual, a short game state is generated. This is common, however, the probability variation jackpot that is a special hit and the general probability variation jackpot that is not a special hit are set so that the level of profit given to the player is greatly different. In other words, with a general probability fluctuation big hit, the open time per attack device 335 (corresponding to the open / close winning device of the present invention) is such that a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls can be won with plenty of time. The time is set, and the opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335 is controlled to be performed a number of times (for example, 15 times) giving many benefits. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit which is a special hit, the opening time per attack device 335 is set to such a time that several (for example, one or two) game balls can barely win. The opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If YES (YES in step S408), the small hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), a deviation reach fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step 411). If it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), a deviation fluctuation display is performed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

  Thus, when a variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is selected based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Determine (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is a timer provided in the RAM 814 mounted on the main control board 94. (In this embodiment, the valid period timer) is set (step S415). In step S415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer. Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 830 by command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 830 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 390a and the second special symbol display 390b, and the special symbol variation display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In the changing process shown in FIG. 64, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501). If it is “2” in step S416 (YES in step S501), the process proceeds to step S501. The processing after S502 is executed, and if it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the changing processing is ended. In step S502, the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display 390b determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the fluctuation time is up, that is, when the fluctuation time is ended (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504). If none of the special symbols have changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

  After stopping the variation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S507). If it is “ON”, the processing flag is set to “4”. Is updated to “0” (step S508). If it is not “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). As described above, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is terminated.

  In the jackpot game start process shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601), the process after step S602 is performed. If the process is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time-saving function is in operation, that is, whether or not the time-saving gaming state is set. The process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a general jackpot or a special jackpot. If the jackpot is a general jackpot (NO in step S606), the attacker unit 335 opens the jackpot 333. The conditions, that is, the number of big hits to be released (for example, a maximum of 15 times), the opening time per time (for example, a maximum of 18 seconds), and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 333 (for example, a maximum of 10 per time) are set ( Step S607). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the special winning opening number (for example, twice) at the big winning opening 333 (for example, twice), the winning limit number (for example, 6), and the opening for each time. A time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is set (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start process shown in FIG. 66, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S508 (YES in step S701), step The processing of S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is ended without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. In step S702, the condition for opening the big prize opening 333 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small hits for the big prize opening 333 by the attacker device 335, and the opening time per one are set. It should be noted that the number of times of opening in the small hit, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of special hit. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  In the special electric utility jackpot control process shown in FIG. 67, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”, and if it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801), step The processing after S802 is executed, and when it is not “5” (NO in step S801), the special electric utility jackpot control processing is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 333 is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big winning opening 333 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S803), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the attacker device 335 is operated to close the special winning opening 333 (step S805). Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 333 after the big winning opening 333 is opened is set in step S607. When the limit number (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805, and the special winning opening 333 is closed. If the opening time of the big winning opening 333 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), The special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big prize opening 333 is not being opened in step S802 (NO), the number of times the big prize opening 333 is opened by the attacker device 335 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the specified number of special hits has been reached (step S806). If not reached (NO in step S806), the attacker device 335 is controlled to open the special winning opening 333 (step S807), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the grand prize opening 333.

  In step S806, when the number of times of opening the big winning opening 333 has reached the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S808 to step S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game state for. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. When winning with the probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started, and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). That is, the probability of winning a big hit in the subsequent lottery is set higher than normal. If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if a special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, the time reduction function The operation is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). In other words, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates in the first special symbol indicator 390a or the second special symbol indicator 390b is shortened, and the movable piece 331 is opened to the second start port 332 while being shortened. Makes it easier to win a prize than usual. On the other hand, if the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not in operation, that is, if neither the probability variation state nor the time reduction gaming state has occurred and the special win is won (NO in step S814), the time reduction function is activated. The process moves to step S813 without being operated.

  On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability variation function in step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S815), and the specified number of operations in the time reduction function is set. (Step S816) Then, it transfers to step S813. That is, the time-shortening function is activated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (a prescribed number).

  68, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If the processing flag is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901), the process proceeds to step S703. The process after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the big winning opening 333 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO) ), It is determined whether or not the special winning opening 333 is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the big prize opening 333 is being opened (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 333 reaches a predetermined time set in advance. In step S904, if it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the attacker device 335 is operated to close the special winning opening 333 (step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special winning opening 333 has been opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906). It is updated to “0” (step S907), and the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. If the opening time of the special winning opening 333 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the opening number has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. Without doing so, the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S903, if the big prize opening 333 is not open (NO), the big prize opening 333 is opened, and a game ball can be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of game balls won for the big prize opening 333 reaches the preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 333 is open (step). S909) If it is open (YES), the special winning opening 333 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the special winning opening 333 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, processing executed by the integrated CPU 834 mounted on the sub integrated substrate 830 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the integrated CPU 834 performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the integrated RAM 836 mounted on the sub-integrated board 830 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this embodiment, the integrated CPU 834 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process for counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses when 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 217, the frame lamp, the game board lamp, the speaker, and the like based on the effect command received from the main control board 94 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the sub-integrated CPU 834 executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 94 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S1200, a control process related to the effect display device 217 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of a notice effect, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and the like are performed.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S1300, the control process regarding a speaker for generating the sound effect (for example, BGM) which promotes a production effect is performed. In the lamp control process in step S1400, control processes related to the game board lamp and the frame lamp are executed. In the information output process of step S1500, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the illumination control board 831 and a display command is transmitted to the illumination control board 832. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady processing to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady processing (step S1100 described later). Do not execute) That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). In the command analysis process, the integrated CPU 834 first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 94 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 94, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is mounted on the sub-integrated board 830. Are stored in the received command storage area in the integrated RAM 836. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the respective areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception order of the reception command storage area is read (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the integrated RAM 836 mounted on the sub integrated board 830 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and if the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). Further, if the read effect command is not a probability change big hit command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). In the effect control process, the integrated CPU 834 performs one of steps S1210 to S1290 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if a variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and a notice effect is set.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, when the variation stop command is received, the display command is transmitted to the electrical control board 832 to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol. To control.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1290) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, an indication indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 217 according to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 94. Control is performed to display during the big hit gaming state (for example, round display).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). In the decorative symbol variation start process, the integrated CPU 834 first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 94. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the off symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b). If the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES), the probability variation big hit symbol is determined. Is determined (step S1225). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). In addition, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received. It may be reset, or may be reset when the jackpot gaming state is ended in the jackpot display process (step S1290).

  In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) associated with both symbols and corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of a combination of figures such as circles, crosses, sankaku, etc., a combination that is a probable big hit design, a combination that is a non-probable big hit (usually big hit), and a combination that is a small hit , And combinations that are out of place are set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, the combination symbol of the combination set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or the combination set as the non-probable big hit symbol is stopped. Determine as a symbol.

  On the other hand, the common decorative symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbol sequences having numbers (for example, three columns). If the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, the symbol combination of any one of the same odd symbol combinations is probable. The symbols are determined as symbols, and any combination of the same even symbols is determined as a non-probable variation big hit symbol. Further, when determining the stop symbol of the off symbol in step S1224, it is determined whether it is a variable display pattern with a reach mode, and if it is a variable display pattern with a reach mode, the left, middle and right common decorative symbols are determined. The left and right common decorative design sequences are the same design, and the middle decorative design sequence is determined to be a stop design that is different from the left and right decorative design sequences. On the other hand, in the case of a variable display pattern that does not involve a reach mode, the stop symbol is determined so that each of the left, middle, and right common decorative symbol sequences becomes a different symbol.

  Next, the integrated CPU 834 executes a background selection process related to the development effect after executing the notification selection process for determining whether or not to execute the notification effect based on the notification determination random number (step S1227) (step S1228). ). Details of this process will be described later. Thereafter, a display command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area, and the stop symbol of the common decorative design sequence determined in steps S1224, S1225, and S1226 is set (step S1229). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process is terminated (step S1230). The display command set in step S1229 is transmitted to the illumination control board 832 in the information output process (step S1500), and the display CPU 851 mounted on the illumination control board 832 receives the display command. Based on this, the effect display device 217 starts execution of variable display of decorative symbols. Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1229, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the previous notice effect from being erroneously executed in the next variation display of decorative symbols.

  Next, a functional configuration related to the effect display including the special symbol, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol sequence will be described based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 80 shows a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board 94, FIG. 81 shows a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board 94, and FIG. FIG. 83 shows a functional configuration related to a normal lottery on the main control board 94, and FIG. 84 shows a peripheral board 811 (mainly The functional structure regarding the production | presentation in the sub integrated board | substrate 830 and the electrical decoration control board 832) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the main control board 94 includes a first hit determination table 911a, a first hit symbol table 912a, a first hit variation time setting table 913a, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. A first off time variation time setting table 914a is stored in advance, and based on these tables 911a to 914a, whether or not the lottery in the first big hit lottery is successful, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 390a, and the variation time Is determined. The first hit determination table 911a shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first hit symbol table 912a shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 390a, and each of the big hit symbol random values divided into a plurality of groups. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol). The first hit time variation time setting table 913a is used when the result of success or failure in the first big hit lottery is big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 390a extracted. The first off time variation time setting table 914a is used when the result of the first big lottery lottery is out of the way and is extracted. It shows the relationship between the random time for variation time and the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 390a. The first lottery probability selection means 920a performs processing for selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Although not shown, the first winning symbol table 912a includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 930a described later is selected.

  The main control board 94 has a random counter (random number generating means) when a winning to the first starting opening 330 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 416 (corresponding to the first winning state detecting means of the present invention). The first hit determination random number extracting means 916a for extracting the big hit determination random number and the first hit design random number extracting means 917a for extracting the big hit symbol random number are provided. In addition, first variation time random number extraction means 918a is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on the determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 916a, the first hit determination means 930a for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the first hit determination table 911a, and the first hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting unit 917a, the first stop symbol determining unit 931a for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 390a using the first hit symbol table 912a is provided. Yes. Further, when the fluctuation time random number is extracted by the first fluctuation time random number extraction means 918a and the big hit determination is determined by the first winning / failing determination means 930a, the first hit time fluctuation time setting table 913a is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined and the random number for the variation time is extracted and determined to be out of the range by the first success / failure determination means 930a, the variation time setting table 914a for the first out-of-range time is determined. The first variation time determining means 932a is provided for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using.

  The main control board 94 also starts the first special symbol change in the first special symbol display 390a and determines the first stop symbol after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 932a elapses. A special symbol fluctuation control means 934 for variably stopping at the stop symbol determined by the means 931a, a success / failure command related to the presence / absence of a big hit determined by the first success / failure determination means 930a before the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and a first Command transmission means 935 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided. Further, the main control board 94 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when a winning to the first start port 330 is detected by the first start port sensor 416 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the first starting memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digesting means 922a for repeatedly displaying the first special symbol as many times as the starting memory number is provided. In other words, the first holding digesting means 922a for waiting for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 416 is provided. The first reservation digesting means 922a will be described in more detail. The first reservation control means 941a and the first digestion control means 942a are provided in the first reservation digesting means 922a, and the first reservation control means 941a is in the process of changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the first start port sensor 416 detects a winning to the first start port 330, if the first start memory number does not reach the upper limit value “4”, the value of the first start memory number is set to “1”. While increasing, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is stored in the uppermost storage area in the special symbol random number storage means 940. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the change of the new first special symbol becomes possible, the first digest control means 942a sets the start memory number related to the first special symbol to “ If not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the first starting stored number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas. Here, a combination of the first hit determination random number extraction means 916a, the first variation time random number extraction means 918a, the first hit / fail determination means 930a, the first stop symbol determination means 931a and the like is the first lottery of the present invention. Corresponds to means. The special symbol fluctuation control means 934 corresponds to the display control means of the present invention, and the combination of the first stop symbol determination means 931a and the first fluctuation time determination means 932a corresponds to the display mode determination means of the present invention.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81, the main control board 94 includes a second hit determination table 911b, a second hit symbol table 912b, and a second hit time variation time setting table 913b as configurations relating to the second big hit lottery. , And a second off-time variation time setting table 914b are stored in advance. Based on these tables 911b to 914b, whether or not the lottery is selected in the second big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 390b, and The variation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

  Further, the main control board 94 has a big hit determination related to the second big win lottery when the second start port sensor 358 (corresponding to the second winning status detection means of the present invention) detects a winning to the second start port 332. Based on the second hit determination random number extraction means 916b for extracting the random numbers for use, the second hit random number extraction means 917b for extracting the big hit symbols related to the second big hit lottery, and the determination random number and the big hit symbol random number Second variation time random number extraction means 918b for extracting variation time random numbers is provided. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the second hit determination random number extracting means 916b, the second hit determination means 930b for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the second hit determination table 911b, and the second hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 917b extracts the big hit symbol random number, second stop symbol determination means 931b for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 390b using the second hit symbol design table 912b is provided. Yes. Further, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction means for second variation time 918b and the big hit is determined by the second determination unit 930b, the second variation time setting table 913b is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and the second success / failure determination means 930b determines that the variation is out of place, the second variation time variation time setting table 914b is determined. A second variation time determining means 932b is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol using the.

  The special symbol variation control means 934 starts the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 390b, and after the lapse of the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 932b, The variation is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means 931b. That is, the special symbol variation control means 934 sequentially varies the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the detection order of the game balls by the first starting port sensor 416 and the second starting port sensor 358, and determines the first stop symbol. The fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the means 931a or the second stop symbol determining means 931b. Further, when a winning to the second starting port 332 is detected by the second starting port sensor 358 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 94 has a fixed number of balls (four times). ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the second start memory number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digesting means 922b is provided for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol by the start memory number. In other words, the second reserved digesting means 922b is provided for waiting for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 358. The second reservation digesting means 922b will be described in further detail. The second reservation control means 941b and the second digestion control means 942b are provided in the second reservation digestion means 922b, and the second reservation control means 941b is used during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When a winning to the second start port 332 is detected by the second start port sensor 358, if the second start stored number has not reached the upper limit value “4”, the value of the second start stored number is set to “1”. While increasing, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the uppermost storage area in the special symbol random number storage means 940. On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the second second special symbol can be changed, the second digestion control unit 942b sets the start memory number related to the second special symbol to “ If it is not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the second starting stored number is decreased by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  Here, the second lottery of the present invention is a combination of the second hit determination random number extraction means 916b, the second variation time random number extraction means 918b, the second win / fail determination means 930b, the second stop symbol determination means 931b and the like. Corresponds to means. A combination of the second stop symbol determining means 931b and the second variation time determining means 932b corresponds to the display mode determining means of the present invention.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 82, the five advantageous games that give the game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 94 based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 930a or the second success / failure determination means 930b. State control means is provided. Here, the advantageous gaming state includes opening the attacker device 335 (corresponding to the open / close winning device of the present invention) and enabling the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 333. The attacker device 335 is controlled to be opened by either the profit granting means 981 or the predetermined profit giving means 982.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit granting means 982 sets the opening time per time of the attacker device 335 as a first predetermined time enough to allow several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls to be won, By performing the opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335 at least once (in this example, twice), a predetermined profit is given to the player. This makes it possible to win a predetermined number of game balls in the big winning opening 333, but since the number of winning balls is extremely small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting means 981 sets the opening time per time of the attacker device 335 as a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with a margin, and the attacker device. By performing the opening / closing operation 335 more times (15 times in this example) than the number of opening / closing operations in the case of giving a predetermined benefit, a specific benefit is given to the player. According to this, it becomes possible to make a large number of game balls win a prize winning opening 333, and the player can obtain a large profit.

  The main control board 94 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 933a and a second advantageous gaming state control means 933b as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 981, and a predetermined profit giving means 982 is provided. As a means for giving a predetermined profit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 933c, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933d, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e are provided.

  The first advantageous gaming state (corresponding to the “first big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 933a is a so-called “probability fluctuation big hit”, and the first success / failure determining means 930a or the second Occurs when the lottery result of the second win / fail decision means 930b is the first result. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 981, and the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 983. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the jackpot determination table at a high probability, it is determined to generate a jackpot gaming state among 631 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 630. 20 jackpot determination values are set, and the jackpot probability, which is the probability of winning the jackpot, is 20/631. On the other hand, in the normal big hit determination table, two big hit determination values are set out of 631 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 630, and the big hit probability is 2/631. Further, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first temporary short state setting means 984 sets the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that varies on the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display 390b. While shortening and increasing the frequency with which the movable piece 331 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery), the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332 is increased more than usual. In other words, the short-time gaming state is set.

  The second advantageous gaming state (corresponding to the “second big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 933b is a so-called “normal big hit”, and the first win / fail determining means 930a or second This occurs when the lottery result of the success / failure determination means 930b is the second result. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 981 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery Remains a low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state is not entered, and the normal probability is maintained. However, in this second advantageous gaming state, after giving a specific profit, until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the second short time state setting means 985 is a short-time gaming state, shortening the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and increasing the frequency with which the movable piece 331 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) Improve ball holding.

  The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c (corresponding to the “third big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) is a so-called “special big hit”, and the first win / fail determining means 930a or the second This occurs when the lottery result of the success / failure determination means 930b is the third result. At this time, first, a predetermined profit (profit lower than a specific profit) is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 982. For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, as in the first advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state is set. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. In other words, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the gaming state is neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state (in other words, the normal gaming state), the short-time gaming state is not generated. The probability variation state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state is generated, the first short-time state setting unit 984 is operated by the short-time generating unit 989, and the short-time gaming state Is generated.

  The fourth advantageous gaming state (corresponding to “small hit” in FIG. 86A) generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933d is that the lottery result of the first success / failure determination means 930a or the second winning / failure determination means 930b is the first. Occurs in the case of four results. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 982. However, for the subsequent lottery, neither a probability variation state nor a short-time gaming state is newly generated. In other words, the gaming state does not change before and after winning, and the level of profit to the player is extremely low compared to other advantageous gaming states. Therefore, in this example, such an unattractive hit (that is, a hit that does not cause an advantageous gaming state) is referred to as “small hit” in order to distinguish it from other hits (big hit). As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in this example, it is decided to generate a small hit gaming state among 631 small hit determination random numbers (using a big hit determination random number) from 0 to 630. Eight small hit determination values are set, and the probability of winning a small hit, that is, the probability of occurrence of the fourth advantageous gaming state is 8/631.

  The fifth advantageous game state generated by the fifth advantageous game state control means 933e (corresponding to the “fourth big hit” in FIG. 86 (b)) is determined by the lottery result of the first success / failure determination means 930a or the second success / failure determination means 930b. Occurs in the case of the fifth result. At this time, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit granting means 982 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 983 are the same as in the third advantageous gaming state. In the advantageous gaming state, the short-time gaming state is generated by the first temporary short state setting means 984 regardless of the gaming state.

  In this example, the winning ratio of each jackpot is distributed as shown in FIG. 86 (b). Specifically, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 933a, that is, the probability fluctuation big hit to which both the probability fluctuation state and the short-time gaming state are given is set to 35% of the whole big hit, The second big hit generated by the advantageous gaming state control means 933b, that is, the normal big hit in which the short-time gaming state is given a certain number of times without being given the probability variation state is set to 35%. Further, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c, that is, the probability variation state and the special big hit to which the conditional short time gaming state is given is set to 27%, and the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e. Is set to 3%, that is, the special jackpot to which both the probability variation state and the short-time gaming state are given. In other words, the first big hit (probability variation big hit) and the second big hit (normal big hit) are generated at the same rate, and the third big hit (special big hit) is set at a slightly lower rate than them. . Further, the ratio of occurrence of the fourth big hit is set to about 1/9 of the third big hit, so that it occurs very rarely.

  By the way, as described above, the probability that a small hit will occur by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933d is set to 8/631, while the probability that a big hit will occur normally is set to 2/631. The ratio between the probability of occurrence of a small hit and the probability of occurrence of a third big hit or a fourth big hit is 1: 0.075. Therefore, although these three types of hits are provided as predetermined profits given by the predetermined profit granting means 982, most of them are small hits, and the probability that the probability fluctuation state occurs is about 7%. Become. In other words, “small hits” that do not generate a probability variation state and are less attractive as hits frequently occur. For this reason, if these hits become distinct and recognizable, there is a concern that frustration will often be caused by the frequent occurrence of “small hits” that are less advantageous, and it is not a big hit. There is a risk that the willingness to play may be impaired by dissatisfaction with the game.

  Therefore, in this example, if the “third advantageous gaming state” occurs when the gaming state is neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state (that is, the normal time), the probability does not occur without generating the short-time gaming state. It is in a fluctuating state. According to this, the “third advantageous gaming state (big hit)” is “fourth fourth” without any difference in the open state of the second start port 332, that is, the operating state of the movable piece 331 in any gaming state. Compared with “advantageous game state (small hit)”, it becomes impossible to visually distinguish and recognize. In other words, even if a “small hit” occurs, it is assumed that “it may be a third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “it may have entered a probability variation state”. It is possible to increase the player's expectation. Therefore, the willingness to play is increased, and the end of the game due to dissatisfaction can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the fifth advantageous gaming state, the short-time gaming state is generated regardless of the gaming state. That is, a big hit state that can be clearly distinguished from a “small hit” that does not become a short-time gaming state is generated. However, the fifth advantageous gaming state occurs less frequently than the third advantageous gaming state, and even if it is recognized that the fifth advantageous gaming state is not the fifth advantageous gaming state, the possibility of being the third advantageous gaming state remains. Therefore, the willingness to play is not reduced. On the contrary, when the 5th advantageous gaming state occurs, it is suggested that the state of probability change has occurred due to the occurrence of the short-time gaming state, which greatly increases the feeling of expectation for the lottery and raises the player's mood. Is possible.

  By the way, in the third advantageous gaming state, after giving a predetermined profit, it is in a probability variation state without generating a short-time gaming state, but if such control is executed regardless of the gaming state, there is a problem. May occur. For example, if the game state is already in the short-time game state and the above control is executed as it is, the short-time game state will end in the middle, giving unnaturalness, and becoming a disadvantageous game state for the player There is a risk of recognition. In addition, when a short-time gaming state has occurred without entering a probability variation state, such as after a specific profit has been granted by the “second advantageous gaming state”, the “third advantageous gaming state” has been reached. In this case, it is possible to easily recognize that the short-time gaming state has ended in the middle, so that it has become the “third advantageous gaming state”, that is, not the “fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit)”. . In other words, the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state” are clearly distinguished, and it becomes impossible to suppress a decrease in expectation due to the “fourth advantageous gaming state”.

  Therefore, in this example, the transition of the gaming state in the third advantageous gaming state is individually set corresponding to the gaming state before the occurrence. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state has occurred, the probability variation state is generated without generating the short-time gaming state as described above. However, in other combinations, that is, when at least one of the short-time gaming state and the probability variation state has already occurred, the short-time gaming state is generated (or continued) and the probability variation A state is generated (or continued).

  That is, when the “third advantageous game state” occurs in the short-time game state, the probability variation state is generated without stopping the short-game state at that time. That is, when the short-time gaming state has already occurred, a part of the functions in the third advantageous gaming state is changed and given to the player. According to this, it is possible to prevent the short-time gaming state from suddenly ending, to suppress distrust to the gaming machine, and to make a visual distinction between the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state”. It can be made clear.

  In addition, even if the gaming state is not the short-time gaming state when the “third advantageous gaming state” is entered, if the probability-changing state is already maintained, the short-time gaming is maintained while maintaining the probability varying state. A state is generated. In other words, in the case where the probability variation state has been caused by the previous “third advantageous gaming state”, the “first advantageous gaming state” or the “second advantageous gaming state” is again given a “ In the case of “3rd advantageous game state”, the short-time game state is given, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 390a or the second special symbol display 390b. And the ease of winning a prize at the second starting port 332 is increased more than usual. As a result, it becomes possible to give a profit more than a predetermined profit (same profit as the fourth advantageous gaming state) as a profit by the “third advantageous gaming state” again, and further increase the expectation for the big hit. Can do. In this case, since the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332 increases, it can be distinguished from the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, but the “third advantageous gaming state” is twice. Since the control is limited to the case where it occurs continuously, it does not affect the decrease in expectation due to the “fourth advantageous gaming state”. This is because if the previous and this time are both in the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, the previous time was in the “fourth advantageous gaming state”, but if the current time is the “third advantageous gaming state” for the first time, This is because the time reduction state does not occur in any of the three advantageous game states and the current “fourth advantageous game state”.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 83, the main control board 94 has a normal lot determination random number extracting means 924 as a configuration related to the normal lottery (lottery for increasing the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 332). A normal hit determination table 926 and a normal hit determination unit 925 are provided. Random number extracting means 924 for determining a normal hit is used for determining a normal hit from a random counter (random number generating means) when a ball entering a passing gate (not shown) is detected by the ball state detecting means 990 (gate sensor). A random number is extracted. The normal hit determination table 926 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. As shown in FIG. 87A, the normal hit determination table 926 has a high probability of 0 to 99. Among the 100 normal hit determination random numbers, five determination values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 5/100. On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, out of 100 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 99, 99 normal hit determination values are set, and the probability of normal hit is 99/100. ing. In the normal lottery at high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.136 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 331 by the start port solenoid 352 is 1654 ms, the number of times of opening is 3, and the interval between opening is It is set to 856 ms. On the other hand, in the normal lottery at the normal time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 14.7 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 331 is set to 1650 ms, the number of times of opening is set to 2, and the interval between opening is set to 2600 ms.

  Further, when the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 924 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the normal hit determination unit 925 extracts the random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 926. Are determined to be normal hits if they match. At this time, the game state is determined by the game state determination means 923, that is, a specific game state, that is, a game state (probability variation state) after a probability change big hit or a game state (time saving game) in a certain period after a big hit (for example, a normal big hit). In the case of a specific gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected, and when it is not a specific gaming state, a normal table is selected.

  Further, when the normal lottery determination means 925 determines whether or not the normal lottery is successful, the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display unit 928 in a variable manner and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of time, a normal symbol fluctuation control means 927 is provided for displaying the result of success / failure. In addition, when the normal hit determination unit 925 determines that the normal hit is determined, after the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped, the movable piece 331 is opened, and the opening control unit 929 makes it easy to win the game ball in the second start port 332. Is provided.

  Next, a configuration related to effects in the peripheral board 811 including the sub-integrated board 830 will be described with reference to FIG. In the effect image displayed on the effect display device 217 of this example, a plurality of images are displayed in stages according to a predetermined order while the decorative symbol is variably displayed with periodicity and the decorative symbol is changing (before the reach state). This includes step effects that can be displayed in an expanded manner, and development effects that can be displayed in a step-by-step manner after the third advantageous game state or the fourth advantageous game state occurs. Hereinafter, the decorative design, the step effect, and the development effect will be described in detail.

(About decorative designs)
In the present example, as the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 217, as shown in the effect example of FIG. 88, a first decorative symbol 991, a second decorative symbol 992, and a common decorative symbol sequence 993 are provided. Yes. The first decorative symbol 991 corresponds to the first special symbol indicator 390a, the second decorative symbol 992 corresponds to the second special symbol indicator 390b, and these are arranged in parallel at the lower right of the display screen. . The first decorative symbol 901 and the second decorative symbol 902 are composed of combinations of figures such as circles and triangles. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change, the corresponding decorative symbol is displayed. It fluctuates and stops at the stop symbol based on the lottery result almost simultaneously with the special symbol change stop.

  On the other hand, the common decorative design row 993 is displayed large over the entire display screen. The common decorative symbol row 993 is a symbol row common to both the first decorative symbol 991 and the second decorative symbol 992, and during the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 991, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (that is, the first big hit lottery drawing). ), And during the change of the second decorative symbol 992, the effect corresponds to the change of the second special symbol (that is, the second big hit lottery). In the common decorative design row 993, for example, three decorative design rows, left, middle, and right, are set, and are variably displayed for each decorative design row. A series of decorative symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol with numbers "0" to "9" and a sub-decorative symbol made up of pictures. The main decorative symbols are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order. In addition, a sub-decoration pattern is arranged between the main decoration symbols to form a series of decoration symbol sequences. The main decorative design and the secondary decorative design are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with periodicity, and the display is changed in the order of left decorative design sequence → right decorative design sequence → middle decorative design sequence. When the game stops and the three decorative symbols are aligned with a combination of jackpot decorative symbols (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”), the special game animation is displayed as a jackpot. In particular, two decorative symbols that have already stopped on the active line (the left decorative symbol and the left decorative symbol) at the stage before the final stop symbol sequence (the middle decorative symbol sequence) that is stopped last among the three decorative symbol sequences is stopped. When the right decorative symbols are the same as each other, the reach state is established with these decorative symbols as reach formation symbols. In addition, the main decorative symbol consists of a plurality of normal symbols indicating “normal jackpot” and a plurality of probability variable symbols indicating “probable big hit”. When a jackpot combination is established with the probability variation symbol, a “probability variation jackpot” is generated.

  88, on the lower side of the display screen, the first state display means 995a and the second state display means 995b indicating the holding state in the two lotteries are displayed on the display area deriving means 944 (FIG. 84). Further, a changing state display unit 998 is provided between the first state display means 995a and the second state display means 995b to indicate which lottery is used for the special symbol that is currently changing. On the left side of the display means 995a, there is provided a point display section 999 for displaying the total of effect points (hereinafter simply referred to as “points”) given in a specific effect. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 88 (b), the first state display means 995a and the second state display means 995b each include four first reserved state display areas 996a to 996a corresponding to the special symbol random number storage means 440, respectively. 996d and four second hold state display areas 997a to 997d, which are arranged in descending order from the inside to the outside. In these hold state display areas, graphics corresponding to each special symbol are displayed in accordance with the number of starting memories (holding number). That is, in this example, the number of starting memories in the first special symbol (first big hit lottery) is “3”, and the number of starting memories in the second special symbol (second big hit lottery) is “2”. ing. In addition, symbols that can be displayed in each hold state display area are basically displayed in a lit state, but symbols corresponding to special symbols that change in the next lottery are displayed in a blinking state. . For this reason, the player can recognize which lottery means the special symbol that is currently changing corresponds to the symbol displayed on the changing display unit 998, and blinking. Recognizing the type of the next lottery by visually checking which of the first hold state display area 996a or the second hold state display area 997a the displayed symbol is displayed in become able to. In the example of production shown in FIG. 88 (b), a numerical value indicating the order of the lottery performed in order is displayed on the upper stage, and a symbol indicating the type of the lottery is displayed on the lower stage. In this example, the shape of the symbol “can” is substantially the same, and the colors of the symbols are different from each other.

(About step production)
In the step effect, the period from the first step to the last step is divided in time series, and different images (moving images) are defined for each step. A plurality of effect patterns are set so that the number of steps developed and displayed in stages is different from each other. In other words, a plurality of effect patterns having different numbers of steps are stored in the effect pattern storage means (not shown) as step effects. For example, when an effect pattern with one step is selected, the first step When only the effect image is displayed and an effect pattern having four steps is selected, the images in the first step to the fourth step can be developed and displayed step by step. In addition, this step effect can be derived as a jackpot notice display within a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation of the common decorative symbol sequence 993 in the effect display device 217 to the reach state. The appearance rate is distributed so that the greater the number of steps developed and displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The jackpot reliability is generated depending on the selection ratio when there are a plurality of effects having different probabilities of being selected as effects at the time of losing. For example, an effect with a lower selection rate at the time of losing has a higher reliability with respect to a big hit and an expected value becomes higher.

(About development effects)
The development effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect included in a series of development effects, and FIG. 90 is a table showing the relationship between the current situation, the type of jackpot, and the background to be shifted accordingly, FIG. 91 is a table showing the relationship between the current situation and the background to be shifted when a small hit occurs, FIGS. 92 to 98 are tables used in the development effect, and FIGS. 99 to 102 are related to the development effect. It is a block diagram which shows a functional structure, and FIG. 103 thru | or 110 is an image which shows an example of an effect.

  The development effect is a series that can appear after a predetermined profit is given, particularly in the third advantageous gaming state (special big hit that becomes a probability fluctuation state) or the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit that does not become a probability fluctuation state). This is the production. In this example, as shown in FIG. 89, it is possible to develop in stages between a “normal background effect” 1001 derived in a normal game state and a “hit state effect” 1006 derived during a big hit game. There are four productions, “place slot production” 1002, “katakata knight chance production” 1003, “chat chat time production” 1004, and “super chat time production” 1005, and “Tokoro Mega” which can be shifted from these productions. "Heaven mode effect" 1007. In addition, this development effect is not developed and displayed step by step in one lottery like the step effect described above, but can be developed in order over a plurality of lotteries (variation display). is there. Here, the “normal background effect” 1001 corresponds to the first normal state effect of the present invention, the “place slot effect” 1002 corresponds to the second normal state effect of the present invention, and the “katakata night chance effect” 1003 is the main effect. This corresponds to the high probability expectation small effect of the invention, “Talking time effect” 1004 corresponds to the high probability expectation large effect of the present invention, “Super chat time effect” 1005 corresponds to the high probability state effect of the present invention, “ Tokorosan mega heaven mode effect "1007 corresponds to a high probability short-time effect.

About “Normal Background Effect” (First Normal State Effect) This effect is an effect performed in the normal game state before the advantageous game state occurs. As a specific effect example, as shown in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104, an effect with the content that the character C is playing a guitar in a predetermined room (for example, a living room) is performed. In addition, the decorative symbol sequence 993 is variably displayed together with this effect, and on the lower side of the effect, a first hold display portion 995a indicating a hold state corresponding to the first special symbol and a hold corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. A second hold display unit 995b indicating the state, a lottery state display unit 998 indicating which special symbol the currently selected lottery corresponds to, and a point display indicating the total number of points generated in this effect Part 999 is displayed. Detailed production contents will be described later.

About the “place slot effect” (second normal state effect) This effect is generated when the third advantageous game state, the fourth advantageous game state, or the fifth advantageous game state occurs while the “normal background effect” 1001 is derived. It is a production that appears. As a specific effect example, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the character C moves from a predetermined room displayed as a background in the “normal background effect” 1001 to a specific room (slot room H). After that, the effect of the content that the character C presses the button B of the slot S and determines the points to be acquired and the transition destination using the output display of the slot S is performed.

About “Katakata Night Chance Production” (High Probability Expectation Small Production) This production is an production showing that there is a possibility that the probability fluctuation state is hidden, and the transition destination determined in “place slot production” 1002 This is an effect that appears when “Katakata Night Chance” becomes. As a specific production example, as shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the production is performed such that the background is night and the point card P displaying the points falls from above the room. Then, when the total of points reaches 100 points, the transition to the next production “Talking time production” 1004 is confirmed. If a “war place card” that is different from the normal point card P falls before the total of points reaches 100 points, the “normal background effect” 1001 is returned from the “katakata night chance effect” 1003. At the same time, all or a part of the accumulated points are cleared by the point erasing means 1103. In this effect, prior to the point card P dropping, the left movable decorative body 235 and the right movable decorative body 234 are controlled so as to move in a rattling manner, and these movable decorative bodies 234 and 235 and the effect image The realism of the production is enhanced through collaboration. Also, at the bottom of this effect screen, there is provided a point display part PT for displaying the accumulated points and a hold state display part H indicating the hold state of each lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has been. A total of 100 points in this effect corresponds to the first condition of the present invention.

About “Talking Time Production” (High Probability Expectation Production) This production is a production showing that there is a high probability that a probability variation state has occurred. This is an effect that can appear when the total reaches 100 points (that is, when the first condition is satisfied). It may appear when the transition destination determined in “place slot effect” 1002 becomes “talking time”. As a specific effect example, as shown in FIG. 109, the left movable decorative body 235 and the right movable decorative body 235 are rotated and suspended, and the first movable decorative body 430 and the second movable decorative body are placed. The bodies 432 (corresponding to the movable decorative body of the present invention) operate to move away from each other and approach each other. That is, the state of the mouth that is talking is created by the pair of movable decorative bodies 430 and 432. In addition, a dialogue (for example, “I am fine today” or “Ye weather”) is displayed on the effect display device 217 so as to be positioned between them, and the dialogue is also output by voice. It is like that. In addition, the dialogue changes based on the progress of the game, and the background of the image gradually changes from the morning landscape to the night landscape. Note that the more the same dialogue continues and the slower the scenery changes, the higher the expectation for “super chatting time production” 1005 increases. In addition, this effect can subsequently appear until the special symbol changes 30 times, and when a predetermined profit is given by the occurrence of the third advantageous gaming state (a big hit that becomes a probability changing state) Only then, the process proceeds to the next “super chat time production” 1005. In other words, even though the probability variation state is caused by the occurrence of the third advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state or the second even if the lottery is performed 30 times or more after the “talking time effect” appears. Only when the specific profit is not given due to the advantageous gaming state, the process shifts to “super chat time production” 1005. When a predetermined profit is given due to the occurrence of the fourth advantageous gaming state, the “normal background effect” 1001 is returned before the number of lotteries reaches 30 after the “talking time effect” appears. It will be. Here, the fact that the number of lotteries reaches 30 corresponds to the second condition of the present invention.

About “Super Talking Time Effect” (High Probability State Effect) This effect is an effect indicating that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous game state control means 933c, and is determined according to the third advantageous game state. This is an effect that appears when a profit is given and the “Talking Time Effect” 1004 effect is repeated 30 times, that is, when the second condition is satisfied. In other words, the production so far suggests that there is a possibility that the probability variation state is latent, or that the probability is high, but this production has confirmed that the probability variation state is latent. It suggests. When this effect appears, this effect is repeated until the first big hit or the second big hit occurs, that is, until a specific profit is given by the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state. It is. This effect is similar to the “Talking time effect” 1004, and it is added that the background appears in lightning (lightning).

About “Tokoro Megaten Mode Effect” (High Probability Short State Effect) This effect is an effect that can be shifted from any of the above-mentioned effects 1002 to 1005, and when a probability variation state and a short time game state occur. It is an effect that appears only for a limited time. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), even when the third advantageous gaming state occurs, if the previous gaming state is the short-time gaming state or the probability variation state, the probability with the short-time gaming state is included. As described above, the change state is changed, but in such a case, the process shifts to “Tokoro Megaten Mode Production” 1007 so that the probability change state is clearly recognized. . In other words, when a short-time gaming state is entered after a predetermined profit has been granted, it becomes possible to recognize that a probability variation state has occurred due to the third advantageous gaming state. A special production that deviates has appeared, and the expectation for the lottery is greatly increased. Even when the fifth advantageous gaming state (fourth big hit) occurs, the short-time gaming state occurs together with the probability variation state, so that this effect appears after giving a predetermined profit to the player. . As a specific effect example, as shown in FIG. 110, the first movable decorative body 430 and the second movable decorative body 432 are operated, and the cooperation with the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 217 is performed. The effect of the content that the decorative design is shown to be broken is performed. At this time, red light is emitted from the second movable decorative body 432, and a sound that causes a tension to the player is output, thereby increasing the player's expectation.

  90 and 91 summarize the state transition in the development effect. These tables show the correspondence between the current state of play (ie, the background before the hit occurs) and the state of play (background) after each hit occurs. The background after a specific profit is given by the first advantageous gaming state (probability variation jackpot), that is, the background when the probability variation state and the short-time gaming state occur. This is a background after a specific profit is given by an advantageous gaming state (usually a big hit), that is, a background when a short-time gaming state with a limited number of times occurs. In addition, the “probability change latency” is a state in which the probability variation state is internally caused by the occurrence of the third advantageous gaming state, but the player cannot determine that the probability variation state is present (appears on the surface). No state). In addition, “gase” indicates that a probability variation state has occurred, but is actually “small hit” and no probability variation state has occurred. As can be seen from FIG. 90, when the “normal background effect” is displayed and the third advantageous game state (the third big hit) occurs, Transition to either “Chance Production” or “Talking Time Production”, and the “3rd Advantage Game State” occurs when “Kata Kata Night Opportunity Production” is displayed in the state that is not in the probability fluctuation state (Gasse) If so, the process shifts to “Talking time production”. On the other hand, as can be seen from FIG. 91, when the “normal background effect” is displayed and the fourth advantageous game state (small hit) occurs, Transition to either “Chance Production” or “Talking Time Production”, and when “Katakata Night Chance Production” is displayed in a state where the probability is not changed (Gasse), the fourth advantageous gaming state occurs. If so, the process shifts to “Talking time production”.

  In other words, if neither the probability fluctuation state nor the short-time gaming state, even if a big hit (probability fluctuation state) occurs due to the third advantageous gaming state, even if a small hit occurs due to the fourth advantageous gaming state, the same Progressive production is performed in the flow. For this reason, it is impossible to distinguish both hits. For example, even if a “small hit” occurs, “it may be the third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “the probability variation state. "It may have rushed in."

  If the 3rd advantageous game state occurs when the “Talking time effect” is displayed in the state of the gas, the game shifts to the “Super chatting time effect”, but the 4th advantageous game state (small hit) ) Does not shift to “Super Chat Time Production”. For this reason, the “super-talking time effect” can be positioned as an effect in which the latency of the probability variation state is fixed, and the “chat time effect” can be changed from “the chatting time effect” to “ There will be a pattern that can be shifted to "Super Talking Time Production", and the change in production will become more noticeable due to the complexity of the production flow.

  In addition, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the probability variation state is hidden, it will shift to “Tokoro Megaten Mode Effect” regardless of what effect is being performed. Yes. According to this, the expectation to the lottery can be greatly enhanced by a special performance. The same applies when the fifth advantageous gaming state (fourth big hit) occurs.

  Also, if the first big hit (first advantageous gaming state) occurs, no matter what kind of performance is performed, after giving a specific profit, it will always be the background of "heaven", the second big hit ( When the second advantageous game state) occurs, it always becomes a background of “chance time” after giving a specific profit, regardless of what kind of effects are performed.

Next, a functional configuration of the peripheral substrate 811 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 84, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 94 (corresponding to the main control means) is received by the command receiving means 951, the peripheral board 811 (corresponding to the sub control means) Various functions for controlling the effect display device 217 are provided.

  That is, as the effect table corresponding to the first big hit lottery, the first hit effect mode table 952a and the first off time effect mode table 953a are stored in advance, and based on these tables 952a and 953a, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

  First, the production mode tables 952a and 953a will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 952a is used in the case of big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between the random number for determining the effect (described later) and the effect mode (in this case, the effect pattern in the step effect and the development effect). It is shown. The first off-time effect mode table 953a is a table used in the case of a loss, and indicates the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

  The peripheral board 881 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 957a for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown) and first effect mode determination means 958a for determining effect patterns. When receiving the control command via the command receiving means 951, the first effect mode determining means 958a extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 957a and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of a small hit), the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extracting means 957a and the effect effect table 952a at the time of the first effect. In the case of indicating an outage, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 957a and the effect mode table 953a during the first effect. Since the development effects are developed step by step over a plurality of performances, when the third advantageous gaming state (big hit) or the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, the basics in the subsequent lottery The flow of production (that is, in what pattern until which production is developed) is determined.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 958a is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 975a. The first effect display control means 975a reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (not shown) to the effect display device 217. Here, the combination of the first effect mode determining means 958a and the first effect display control means 975a corresponds to the display control means of the present invention. The first effect display control means 975a also functions as a common effect execution means and a third unique effect execution means of the present invention.

  On the other hand, a first decorative symbol variation control means 976a is provided as a functional configuration relating to the effect of the first decorative symbol 991. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 951, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 976a reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and includes variations included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described, but the peripheral board 881 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, a second winning effect mode table 952b and a second off-time effect mode table 953b are stored in advance as performance tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery. These tables 952b and 953b are stored in advance. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. The production mode tables 952b and 953b have the same configuration as the production mode tables 952a and 953a corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Further, on the peripheral board 881, corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 957b, the second effect mode determination means 958b, the second effect display control means 975b, and the second decorative symbol variation control means. 976b is provided, but since these configurations also have the same functions as the functional configurations corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description will be omitted.

  Further, the peripheral board 881 is provided with a decorative symbol sequence variation display means 960 and a big hit display means 964. The decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 960 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol fluctuation control means 976a and the second decorative symbol fluctuation control means 976b or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 951. The column 993 is changed, and the common decorative design row 993 is sequentially stopped based on the change time and the success / failure command included in the control command (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that have already stopped on the active line at the stage before the final stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences 993 is a specific decoration. When the combination of symbols is satisfied, the reach state is established with the decorative symbol already stopped as the reach formation symbol.

  The jackpot display means 964 performs the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design row 993, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the small hit, the “decision” is not displayed and the common decorative design column 993 is displayed. After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

  Further, the peripheral board 881 is provided with a winning state implicit means 995 and a winning state indicating means 996. The winning state implied means 995 makes the player uncertain which of the winnings is given when a predetermined profit is given to the player by the third advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state. . Specifically, as described above, the “place slot effect”, the “katakata night chance effect”, and the “talking time effect” are to be allowed to appear in any advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, the winning state indication means 996 is specified by the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state even if a predetermined number of lotteries have been carried out from the provision of the profit when the predetermined benefit is given by the third advantageous gaming state. It is clear that the probability fluctuation state is hidden when the benefit of is not granted. Specifically, as described above, the “super chat time production” is to appear. According to this, it is possible to suppress “a game is ended halfway because it is not noticed even though it is in a probability variation state”.

  Next, the functional configuration and the flow of effects related to the development effect will be described in detail. The first effect display control means 975a and the second effect display control means 975b are the first normal state effect control means 1100 (shown in FIG. 99) related to the normal background effect and the second normal state related to the slot effect for the development effect. Production control means 1200 (shown in FIG. 100), high-probability expected small production control means 1300 (shown in FIG. 101) related to the Katakata night chance production, and high-probability expected large production control means 1400 (shown in FIG. 102) related to the chatting time production. ).

  As shown in FIG. 99, the first normal state effect control means 1100 has a special effect execution means 1101 and a point generation permission means 1103 as functional configurations. The special effect execution means 1101 executes a special effect that can appear during normal background effects, especially when the second special symbol is changed, and requests operation of the operation button (push button) 1102 during the effects. . When the special effect is derived, the point generation permission unit 1103 permits an item (including a point and an item symbol) to be provided when the operation button 1102 is pressed. In other words, if the normal background effect is performed in the normal gaming state, it is not a special effect, or if the operation button 1102 is not operated by the player even if the special effect is performed, the item is not displayed. ing.

  As a specific effect example, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when a special effect is executed, a character “PUSH” is displayed on the lottery state display portion 998 and the operation button 1102 is pressed. Required. When the operation button 1102 is operated, a lottery is performed, and the items to be given are displayed on the lottery status display unit 998. The item may be a point (score) as shown in FIG. 104 (a) or an item symbol other than the point as shown in FIG. 104 (b) (T-shirt in this example). Further, when points are given as items, those points are accumulated and displayed on the point display section 999.

  As described above, since the special effect can be executed only when the second special symbol is changed and the operation button 1102 is operated when the special effect appears, the item is allowed to be given. It is possible to suppress the frequency at which the item is given, and to add a sharpness between the case where the item is given and the case where the item is not given, and it is possible to increase the interest in displaying the item. Further, it is possible to visually distinguish the lottery based on the first special symbol and the lottery based on the second special symbol, and it is possible to easily recognize that two types of lotteries are being performed. In particular, since the second start port 332 for starting the variation of the second special symbol suppresses the winning of the game ball unless it becomes a specific gaming state, the frequency of the item being given even in the normal gaming state is effective. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the operation of the operation button 1102 is requested, it is possible to actively participate in the production and acquire the item as if it were a game, instead of a passive production that is merely seen.

  Further, the first normal state effect control means 1100 includes a privilege grant control means 1104, an item display control means 1120, and a first point accumulating means 1121. The privilege grant control means 1104 gives an item based on the output of the point generation permission means 1103, the item selection table 1105 storing a plurality of types of items including points, and item selection prior to the derivation of the special effects. The item selection random number extraction unit 1106 for extracting the random number for use and the item determination unit 1107 for determining one item based on the extracted item selection random number and the item selection table 1105 are provided. In particular, the item selection table 1105 includes an item distribution table 1108 and an item conversion table 1109 as shown in FIG. The item distribution table 1108 shows the relationship between the item type (item contents) corresponding to each pattern and the distribution of each pattern. Here, patterns 1 to 10 correspond to item symbols, and patterns 11 to 13 correspond to points. In the item design, “TV”, “controller”, “guitar”, “banana”, and “T-shirt (blue)” of patterns 1 to 5 are relatively likely to appear. “T-shirt (green)”, “T-shirt (red)”, “T-shirt (white)”, “T-shirt (gold)”, and “window explosion” are relatively difficult to appear. On the other hand, “5 points” of pattern 11 occupies 40% of the entire item and is very easy to be given, whereas “10 points” is 2% of the whole and “20 points” is 0 of the whole. .5 percent, making it very difficult to apply.

  The item conversion table 1109 is used when the pattern selected based on the item distribution table 1108 and the item selection random number is any one of the patterns 11 to 13, that is, when a point is selected as an item to be added. It is a table. In this item conversion table 1109, whether or not the points are converted into the pattern 5 (T-shirt (blue)) is distributed at a predetermined ratio corresponding to the total of points accumulated so far. For example, if the total up to now is 0 to 19 points, no conversion is performed at all, but if it is 40 to 59 points, 30 percent is converted, and when it reaches 100 points, all conversion is performed. It has become so. That is, the larger the total number of stored points, the easier it is to convert the pattern 5 to the item image. In other words, it is set so that the probability that points are given becomes lower as it approaches 100 points. For this reason, it can suppress that the sum total of points reaches | attains a fixed value immediately, and the pleasure which collects points can be continued over a comparatively long term.

  By the way, if “0 points” are provided as points, the total of points can be controlled so as not to reach a certain value (100 points). However, when “0 points” is displayed, There is a possibility of giving an unpleasant feeling, and in particular, there is a concern that it may be annoying when it is displayed continuously many times. On the other hand, in this example, an item image is displayed instead of displaying “0 points”. For this reason, even if the given points are “0 points” and the total of the points does not change, it is possible to suppress the player's mood drop and to give visual interest by the item image Can do. In particular, as the item distribution table 1108, a table corresponding to a case where the lottery result is a win and a table corresponding to a case where the lottery is off are prepared. ) Is distributed differently. In other words, each item image is associated with an expected value for the lottery result, and when the item selection random number extraction unit 1106 extracts the item selection random number, the item selection random number and the item distribution table 1108 are extracted. The item image is determined based on the result of the determination. In this way, since it is possible to display an item image corresponding to the expected value of the lottery, it is possible to focus attention on the item image even when no points are displayed.

  99, the point or item image determined by the item determining unit 1107 is displayed on the lottery state display unit 998 by the item display control unit 1120. If points are awarded, the points are accumulated by the first point accumulating unit 1121 and the total is displayed on the point display unit 999.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100, the second normal state effect control means 1200 has a slot effect execution means 1203 and a slot point generation means 1204 as functional configurations. The slot effect executing means 1203 is used when the third big hit determining means 1201 determines that the lottery result is the third big hit or when the small hit determining means 1202 determines that the lottery result is the small hit. The execution of the slot effect (corresponding to the second normal state effect of the present invention) is started. The slot point generating means 1204 generates points in the slot effect. Prior to the slot effect, the point distribution table 1205 showing the relationship between the total of points and the distribution (appearance rate) of the given points. The point determination random number extracting means 1206 for extracting the granted point determination random number, and when the assigned point determination random number is extracted, the points are determined based on the determination random number, the total of stored points, and the point distribution table 1205 Point determining means 1207 for determining a value is provided.

  As the point distribution table 1205, a slot effect distribution table 1208 as shown in FIG. 94 is used. This slot effect distribution table 1208 shows the relationship between the contents of the effect corresponding to the pattern and the total of points currently accumulated, that is, the total of points accumulated in the normal background effect, and each numerical value is a denominator. Represents the ratio when. Here, the pattern 1 to the pattern 12 display the point value in the place slot effect, and the pattern 13 to the pattern 22 displays “to shift to the chatting time effect” in the place slot effect. In this table, “bita” means that the reel of the slot stops at the point or the destination, and “arrow” once stops at a different symbol (the symbol on the left side of the arrow) It means to shift to the true symbol (the symbol on the right side of the arrow). For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the state where the point just stops on the display D of the slot is “bita”, and as shown in FIG. is there. The slot effect distribution table 1208 includes a plurality of cases (for example, pattern 1 and pattern 2) having the same effect contents (those having the same effect result). Displayed variation patterns) are different from each other, and different production processes are displayed.

  By the way, when a point is given in a certain slot effect, if the total of the points may reach a certain value, it is not possible to match between the certain slot effect and the next katakana night chance effect. In other words, in the Katakata Night chance production, the production of “Accumulating points granted and shifting to the chat time production when the total of the points reaches a certain value” is performed, but before the Katakata Night chance production appears However, if the total of points reaches a certain value, the existence of the katakana night chance production itself is meaningless.

  However, according to the slot effect distribution table 1208 of this example, the area from the pattern 1 to the pattern 12, that is, the area displaying the points (hereinafter referred to as “first area”), and the area from the pattern 13 to the pattern 22 are displayed. In other words, it is divided into areas that display the transition destination (hereinafter referred to as “second area”). In the first area, a certain value is obtained even if the added points are added to the total of accumulated points. The points are distributed so as not to reach (100 points). On the other hand, when the determined effect is included in the second area, the slot effect is shifted to the chat time effect without causing the Katakata night chance effect to appear. In other words, if a certain value is not reached even after the points to be given are added, the game is shifted to the katakana night chance effect after the points are given. On the other hand, if the certain value is reached, the chat time effect is shifted. In the case of directly shifting to the chatting time effect, the point becomes unnecessary after that, and the transition destination is displayed without displaying the point. Further, in the slot effect distribution table 1208, the higher the total number of points stored (the closer to 100 points), the higher the possibility that an effect in the second area is selected. In other words, the higher the stored points, the easier it is to shift to chatting time production. In particular, when the total number of points stored in the normal background effect has reached 100 points, the process is always shifted to the chat time effect regardless of the random number for determining the granted points. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the contradiction between the effects and to realize the superiority of the effects due to reaching a certain value at a relatively early stage.

  The slot effect distribution table 1208 uses the same table regardless of whether the lottery result is a third big hit or a small hit. In other words, in the slot effect, the contents of the effect are determined using tables distributed at the same rate, so even a small hit is visually distinguished from a special hit with a probability variation state. I can't do that.

  When the point determination unit 1207 selects a pattern in the first area of the slot effect distribution table 1208, the point is output to the second point accumulation unit 1220, and the points accumulated by the first point accumulation unit 1121 are displayed. That is, it is added to the total of points accumulated in the normal background effect. Thereafter, when the first effect transition control means 1221 is operated and the pattern selected in the slot effect distribution table 1208 is included in the first area, that is, when the total of points has not reached 100 points, When the slot effect is shifted to the Katakata Night chance effect, and when the selected pattern is included in the second area, the special background effect appearance means 1222 is changed to shift from the slot effect to the chatting time effect. Control. The special background effect appearing means 1222 displays any development effect on the effect display device 217. The special background effect appearing means 1222 is provided with a transition destination notice display means 1223, and appears. When switching the production to be performed, the transition destination is displayed in the production in the previous lottery.

  Further, the second normal state effect control means 1200 is provided with a route determination means 1224 and a Katakata derivation number setting means 1227 for use in the next effect Katakata Night chance effect. The route determination unit 1224 operates when the lottery result is a small hit and the first production transition control unit 1221 decides to shift to the Katakata Night chance production, and develops more than the Kata Kata Night chance production. One of the first route to return to the normal background effect without development and the second route to return to the normal background effect and then return to the normal background effect is determined based on the total of points. That is, the route determination unit 1224 has the route distribution table 1225 shown in FIG. 93, and the distribution of the first route (1A) or the second route (1B) is accumulated by the second point accumulation unit 1220. It is set in association with the point. In the route distribution table 1225, the distribution ratio is set such that the greater the total number of points, the higher the probability that the second route (1B) will be selected. For this reason, even if there are few points given in the Katakata Night chance production, if the total of points accumulated in the normal background production or the slot production is large, there is a possibility of shifting to the chat time production Becomes higher.

  The Katakata derivation number setting unit 1227 sets the number of times of continuous derivation of the Katakata night chance 1003. The derivation number distribution table 1228 indicating the relationship between the route determined by the route determination unit 1224 and the number of continuation derivations, and the number determination When the random number for frequency determination is extracted and the random number for frequency determination is extracted, the number of continuous derivations is determined based on the random number for determination, the determined route, and the derivation frequency distribution table 1228. The number-of-times determining means 1240 is provided. In particular, in the derivation frequency allocation table 1228, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the continuous derivation frequency (that is, the number of games) is changed between 6 times and 10 times. Is set for each route. Here, the numerical value indicates the ratio when the denominator is 200, “Katakata 1A” is the first route, that is, the route that ends in the Katakata Night chance production, and “Katakata 1B” is the second route, that is, The route ends after the talk time production has been developed, and “Katakata 2” is the production that results in a lottery and the super chat time production. In the derivation frequency allocation table 1228 of this example, the allocation of the continuous derivation times in “katakata 1B” and “katakata 2” is the same, and the continuation derivation frequency is 9 times most frequently. On the other hand, “Katakata 1A” is set so that the number of continuous derivations is smaller than that of “Katakata 1B” and “Katakata 2”. As the number increases, the distribution rate decreases. Therefore, when shifting to the chatting time effect, it is possible to raise the feeling of expectation gradually by the Katakata Night chance effecting, which is the middle stage, and to raise the mood when shifting to the chatting time effect. On the other hand, if you do not shift to chatting time production, you can suppress the decline in motivation for not developing into chatting time production by ending the Katakata Night chance production at a relatively early stage Become. Here, the katakata derivation number setting means 1227 corresponds to the derivation number setting means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the high-probability expected small effect control means 1300 has a Katakata effect execution means 1301 and a Katakata point generation means 1302 as functional configurations. The Katakata effect execution means 1301 starts the Katakata night chance effect based on the output of the first effect transition control means 1221 (see FIG. 100). The Katakata point generating means 1302 gives predetermined points as a privilege during the Katakata Night chance production, and shows the relationship between the total of points accumulated by the second point accumulating means 1220 and the distribution of the given point values. Point distribution table 1303 to be shown, point determination random number extraction means 1304 for extracting a given point determination random number before the transition to the Katakata Night chance effect, and when the given point determination random number is extracted, the determination random number, A point determination unit 1305 for determining points to be given based on a total of accumulated points and a point distribution table 1303 is provided. The point distribution table 1303 is a notice effect distribution table 1306 (see FIG. 95 (b)) showing the correspondence between each pattern and the contents of the effect in the Katakata Night chance effect, and the relationship between each pattern and the total of points (distribution). ) Three types of drop point distribution tables 1307, 1308, and 1309 (see FIG. 96). In the notice effect distribution table 1306 shown in FIG. 95 (b), the patterns 3 to 6 are effects related to points, specifically, the effect of dropping the point card P on which the points are displayed, and the patterns 7 to 9 are This is an effect that something other than the point card P falls. The effects of Pattern 7 to Pattern 9 appear as a precursor to transition to a normal background effect or a chatting time effect. Pattern 2 is an effect in which only the right movable decorative body 234 and the left movable decorative body 235 are movable and the point card P does not appear.

  The fall point distribution table is divided based on the route determined by the route determining means 1224 and the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result is a small hit and the first route (katakata 1A) is selected, the drop point distribution table 1307 corresponding to the case where the lottery result is a small hit and the second route (katakata 1B) is selected. And a drop point distribution table 1309 corresponding to the case where the lottery result is the third big hit (katakata 2). The drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 corresponding to Katakata 1B or Katakata 2 are the same as each other, and the drop point distribution table 1307 corresponding to Katakata 1A is more than the other two distribution tables 1308 and 1309. This makes it difficult to select a pattern with a high point value. In any of the drop point allocation tables 1307, 1308, and 1309, the larger the total of stored points, the harder the point value is given.

  In particular, in this example, when the point value is determined, in the case of “Katakata 1A”, even if the continuous derivation number set by the katakata derivation number setting means 1227 is performed, the total of points is a constant value ( The point value is determined so that it does not reach (100 points). On the other hand, in the case of “Katakata 1B” or “Kakatakata 2”, when the Katakata Night chance effect of the last round or slightly before it is derived The point value is determined so that the total of points reaches a certain value. In other words, in the Katakata Night chance production, it seems that it is possible to shift to the chat time production on the condition that the given points reach 100 points, but in fact, the Katakata Night chance production continues The number of derivations and the transition destination (route) of the effect are set in advance, and the points given to match the number of continuation derivations and the transition destination are determined. In other words, even if the total number of points given is a constant value, the transition to the chat time production is performed until the number of executions of the Katakata Night Chan production reaches the number of continuous derivations set by the Katakata derivation number setting means 1227. Postponed. For this reason, it can be suppressed that the katakana night chance production becomes extremely short and the content of the production cannot be fully enjoyed, or conversely becomes extremely long and tired of repetition of the production. In addition, in the Katakata Night chance production, if the total of points reaches a certain value, it can be recognized that “it has been promised to develop into a chatting time production”, and to shift to the chatting time production Can increase their willingness.

  By the way, when developing into a chatting time effect, drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 shown in FIG. 96 (b) or (c) are used, but since each effect pattern is determined based on random numbers, Even if the set number of continuous derivations is performed, the total number of points may not reach a certain value during that time. That is, there is a possibility that the katakana night chance effect will end without reaching a certain value. Therefore, in this example, when it is decided to develop into a chatting time production, even if the final Katakata night chance production is performed, if the total of points does not reach a certain value, the chatting time production is performed. A display to the effect of transition, for example, “Large mark” of pattern 9 is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize that “the total of points could not reach a certain value, but has shifted to chatting time production due to remedies”, and the point shifts to chatting time production without reaching a certain value. It does not arouse mysterious feelings about doing. Note that this “main point mark” may be displayed instead of the point, and in this case, even if the total of the points does not reach a certain value, the transition to the chatting time effect is ensured. That is, in the drop point distribution table 1307 shown in FIG. 96A, no distribution is provided for the pattern 9, but in the drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 shown in FIGS. Therefore, it can appear only when shifting to the chat time production.

  As shown in FIG. 101, when a point is generated by the Katakata point generating means 1302, the point is output to the third point accumulating means 1320 and sequentially added to the total of points accumulated by the second point accumulating means 1220. Is added. The total of all points is displayed on the point display section PT (see FIG. 108) displayed at the bottom of the Katakata Night chance effect, and when the total of points reaches a certain value, that fact is displayed. It has come to be.

  Further, the high-probability expected small effect control means 1300 includes a derivation number counting means 1321 for counting the number of executions of the Katakata Night chance effect, and the number of executions counted is the continuous derivation number set by the Katakata derivation number setting means 1227. The second production transition control means 1322 is provided for transitioning from the Katakata Night chance production to the chatting time production or from the Katakata Night chance production to the normal background production.

  In addition, the high-probability expected small effect control means 1300 is provided with point erasing means 1323 for erasing a part or all of the stored points when shifting from the Katakata Night chance effect to the normal background effect. The point erasure unit 1323 includes a remaining point distribution table 1324, a remaining point determination random number extraction unit 1325 for extracting the remaining point determination random number, the extracted remaining point determination random number, and the total of the stored points (that is, the third point And a remaining point determination means 1326 for determining whether or not to leave points based on a remaining point distribution table 1324. In the remaining point distribution table 1324, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), distribution for pattern 7 (effect that leaves no points) and pattern 8 (effect that leaves 20 points) is set in correspondence with the total of points. As the total number of points increases, the rate at which the pattern 8 is selected increases. For example, if the total number of points is 20 points or less, there is no effect that leaves points, but if the total number of points is 51 points or more, the effect that leaves points and the effect that does not leave points are halved. Appears at a rate. In this way, the larger the total of points, the easier it is to leave some of them, and when they are left, after returning to the normal background effect, the accumulation is resumed from the remaining points. . Accordingly, it is possible to reduce a decrease in expectation when returning from the katakana night chance effect to the normal background effect, and to suppress the game from being ended at that time. Here, the Katakata point generating means 1302 corresponds to the point giving means of the present invention, and the second effect transition control means 1322 corresponds to the effect transition postponing means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the high-probability expected large effect control unit 1400 has a chatting effect execution unit 1401 and a chatting derivation number setting unit 1402 as functional configurations. The chatting effect execution means 1401 starts the chatting time effect based on the output of the first effect transition control means 1221 (see FIG. 100) or the second effect transition control means 1322 (see FIG. 101). The chatting derivation number setting means 1402 determines the derivation number for each background effect in the chatting time effect based on the lottery. More specifically, the chatting time effect has three types of background images including morning, evening, and night as background effects, and these background images are sequentially switched and displayed. Then, the chatting time effect using each background image is executed by the number of times set by the chatting derivation number setting means 1402. The chatting derivation number setting means 1402 includes a pattern distribution table 1403 indicating the relationship between the number pattern obtained by combining the derivation times of the respective background effects and the lottery result, and a random number for pattern selection before the transition to the chatting time effect. Based on the extracted pattern selection random number extraction means 1404, the extracted pattern selection random number, the lottery result (ie, the output of the third big hit determination means 1201 or the small hit determination means 1202), and the pattern distribution table 1403 And a derivation number recognizing means 1406 for recognizing the derivation number in each background effect from the determined number pattern. The pattern distribution table 1403 includes a chatting (1) table 1407 shown in FIG. 97 and a chatting (2) table 1408 shown in FIG. Here, “Talking (1)” indicates that the lottery result is the fourth result (small hit), and “Talking (2)” indicates that the lottery result is the third big hit (special hit with probability variation state). ). The number of modes (corresponding to the number of derivations) contains three types of numerical values. From the left, this indicates the number of derivations in the morning background, evening background, and night background. ing. For example, (3, 3, 24) described in the first column performs “morning background effect” three times, then “evening background effect” three times, and “night background effect” 24 times. This shows that a chat time effect is performed 30 times in total. Although omitted for convenience, a numerical value indicating the background of the morning and a numerical value indicating the background of the evening are also set to be reversed, and each is assigned at a ratio of 1: 1. For example, when the number of modes is (3, 6, 8) and the distribution ratio is 142/200014, the “morning background effect” is 3 times, the “evening background effect” is 6 times, and the “night background” There is a pattern in which “direction” is performed 8 times, and a pattern in which morning and evening are reversed, “morning background effect” is performed 6 times, “evening background effect” is performed 3 times, and “night background effect” is performed 8 times. Each of them is selected at a distribution ratio of 71/200014.

  As can be seen from the chatting (1) table 1407 and the chatting (2) table 1408, the total number of derivations in the chatting time effect is a fixed number (30 in this example) in the case of chatting (1) (in the case of small hits). In the case of chat (2) (in the case of third big hit), the number is limited to a certain number. For this reason, if the transition is not made to the super chatting time production, the chatter time production is performed less than a certain number of times, and then the normal background production is resumed. It will develop after the time production. Therefore, the player wishes that the chatting time effect is continuously executed a certain number of times, and does not provoke dissatisfaction or irritation even if the relatively monotonous effect is repeated. . The certain number of times (for example, 30 times) is set to a number that is larger than the number of predictions until the big hit, which is predicted based on the probability that the first hit or the second hit occurs in the probability variation state. For this reason, even if the number of lotteries predicted to be a big hit has elapsed, when such an advantageous game state is not achieved, the super chat time effect is shifted to. In other words, `` If the probability fluctuation state did not occur '', the super chatting time production appears to aim at the timing of starting to be aware of the end of the game, so the joy of the super chatting time production appearing further In addition to being large, it is possible to suppress the end of the game despite the fact that the probability variation state is hidden.

  Further, in the chatting (2) table 1408, as compared with the chatting (1) table 1407, the ratio of deriving the “morning background effect” or “evening background effect” is relatively high. For example, the probability that both the “morning background effect” and the “evening background effect” are derived 12 or more in the case of chatting (1) is 200/200014, but in the case of chatting (2). Is 1100/200014, which is selected at a rate of about 5.5 times. That is, when the lottery result is the third big hit, the background effect switching is set to be slower than when the lottery result is the small hit. In this way, the slower the switching of the background effect, the higher the possibility that it will be the third hit, that is, the possibility of developing into a super chatting time effect, so it becomes possible to pay attention to the switching of the background effect. .

  As shown in FIG. 102, the high-probability expected large effect control means 1400 counts the number of executions of the chatting time effect by the chatting effect count unit 1409 for counting each background effect and the chatting effect count unit 1409. The background effect switching unit 1420 that switches the background effect every time the number of executions for each background effect reaches the derivation number set by the chatting derivation number setting unit 1402, and the entire chatting time effect counted by the chatting effect number counting unit 1409 When the number of executions reaches the total number of derivations set by the chatter derivation number setting means 1402, third effect transition control means 1421 is provided for shifting to either the normal background effect or the super chatter time effect. Yes. That is, when the lottery result is a small hit, the third effect transition control means 1421 shifts the chatting time effect to the normal background effect after performing the continuous derivation number, while the lottery result is the third big hit. After the number of continuous derivations of the chatting time production, the transition to super chatting time production is made. In other words, whether or not to shift to the super chat time production, each background production is derived in turn by the number of times determined in the lottery, so that the contents of the production and changes in the background can be fully enjoyed. .

  Next, the flow of processing (background selection processing) in the above-described development effect will be described based on the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 74 shows the background selection processing, FIG. 75 shows the special background processing in the background selection processing, FIG. 76 shows the Katakata 1A background processing in the special background processing, and FIG. 77 shows the Katakata 1B background in the special background processing. FIG. 78 shows the chat 1 background process in the special background process, and FIG. 79 shows the chat 2 background process in the special background process.

  In the background selection process shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether a special background has been selected, that is, whether a development effect to be derived has been determined (step S1301). When the special background is selected (YES in step S1301), the lottery result is a predetermined hit pattern other than the third big hit or the small hit, that is, the first big hit or the second that shifts to the big hit state effect. It is determined whether it corresponds to a big hit or a fourth big hit that shifts to the Tokoro mega heaven mode effect (step S1302). In step S1302, if it is included in the predetermined hit pattern (YES in step S1302), the background selection process is terminated, and if it is not included in the predetermined hit pattern (in step S1302). NO), special background processing is executed (step S1303). The special background process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the special background is not selected in step S1301 (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (step S1304). It is determined whether any one of patterns 1 to 12 (that is, the first region) is selected in the effect distribution table 1208 (see FIG. 94) (step S1305). If the pattern of the first area is selected (YES in step S1305), the first route (1A) is selected in the Katakata selection table (corresponding to the route distribution table 1225 (see FIG. 93)). (Step S1306). If the first route (1A) is selected (YES), the Katakata 1A flag is set (step S1307), while if the first route is not selected, that is, the second route (1B) is selected. If so (NO in step S1306), the Katakata 1B flag is set (step S1308). Thus, after the Katakata 1A or Katakata 1B flag is set, the number of continued derivations is determined based on the stay game number distribution table (corresponding to the derivation number distribution table 1228 (see FIG. 95 (a))). The number of times is set in the stay counter (step S1309).

  On the other hand, if any of pattern 13 to pattern 22 (that is, the second region) is selected in slot effect distribution table 1208 (NO in step S1304), the chatter 1 flag is set (step S1310), Based on the chatting mode stay game number distribution table (corresponding to the chatting (1) table 1407 (see FIG. 97)), the number of derivations for each background effect in the chatting time effect is determined, and the number is set in the counter (step S1311).

  If it is determined in step S1304 that it is not a small hit (NO), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a third big hit (step S1312). If it is the third big hit (YES in step S1312), any one of patterns 1 to 12 in the specific slot effect distribution table (equivalent to the small hit slot effect distribution table 1208) (that is, the first hit) It is determined whether or not (one area) is selected (step S1313). If the pattern of the first area is selected (YES in step S1313), the chat 2 flag is set (step S1314), and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, the chat (2) table 1408 is used as the chat mode stay game number distribution table. On the other hand, if any of pattern 13 to pattern 22 (that is, the second region) is selected in slot effect distribution table 1208 (NO in step S1313), the Katakata 2 flag is set (step S1315), and step The process moves to S1309.

  If it is not determined that the third big hit is determined in step S1312, (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is the fourth big hit (fifth result) (step S1316). The four background flags are set (step S1317), and the background selection process ends. Also, if it is not determined that the fourth big hit (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is the second big hit (step S1318), and if the second big hit (YES), the second background flag is set. (Step S1319), the background selection process is terminated. Furthermore, if it is not determined that the second big hit (NO), it is determined whether the lottery result is the first big hit (step S1320). If the first big hit (YES), the first background flag is set. (Step S1321), the background selection process is terminated. If it is not the first big hit, the background selection process is terminated as it is.

  In the special background process shown in step S1303, as shown in FIG. 75, first, the special background 2 is selected, that is, either the Katakata night chance effect or the chat time effect is selected as the development effect to be derived. Is determined (step S1329). If special background 2 is selected (YES in step S1329), Katakata 1A background processing (Step S1330), Katakata 1B background processing (Step S1340), Katakata 2 background processing (Step S1350), Chat 1 Background processing (step S1360) and chatter 2 background processing (step S1380) are sequentially executed, and then a display command corresponding to the special background pattern is set (step S1395).

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the Katakata 1A background process, it is determined whether or not the Katakata 1A flag is set in Step S1307 (Step S1331). If the Katakata 1A flag is set (YES), the Katakata Night chance is determined. It is determined whether the number of stay games (the number of executions) of the production corresponds to the final game (final game) (step S1332). If it corresponds to the final game (YES in step S1332), the final effect is selected based on the final distribution table (corresponding to the remaining point distribution table 1324 (see FIG. 95C)) (step After that, the normal background shift flag is turned on (step S1334). On the other hand, if the number of stay games does not correspond to the final game (NO in step S1332), a pattern is selected in the drop point distribution table 1307 (see FIG. 96A) and the stay game counter is set to “1”. To finish the Katakata 1A background processing. If it is determined in step S1331 that the Katakata 1A flag is not set (NO), the Katakata 1A background processing is terminated as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in Katakata 1B background processing and Katakata 2 background processing (hereinafter collectively referred to as Katakata 1B (2) background processing), the Katakata 1B flag is set in Step S1308, or Katakata 1B is processed in Step S1315. 2 is set (step S1341), and if the Katakata 1B flag or Katakata 2 flag is set (YES), it is determined whether or not the stay fluctuation counter is the maximum value, that is, the last Katakata. It is determined whether it is a night chance effect (step S1342). If the counter is at the maximum value (YES in step S1342), the chatter 1 flag (in the case of Katakata 1B background processing) or the chatter 2 flag (in the case of Katakata 2 background processing) is set (Step S1343). Further, as in step S1311, the number of derivations for each background effect in the chat time effect is determined based on the chat mode stay game number distribution table, and the number of times is set in the counter (step S1344).

  On the other hand, if the stay fluctuation counter is not at the maximum value (NO in step S1342), a pattern is selected from the drop point distribution tables 1308 and 1309 (see FIGS. 96 (b) and (c)), and “1” is added to the stay game counter, and the Katakata 1B (2) background processing ends. If it is determined in step S1341 that the Katakata 1B flag or Katakata 2 flag is not set (NO), the Katakata 1B (2) background processing is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the chatter 1 background process, it is determined whether or not the chatter 1 flag is set in step S1310 or step S1343 (step S1361). If the chatter 1 flag is set (YES), It is determined whether the variation counter has reached the set mode number, that is, whether the number of derivations set for each background effect has been reached (step S1362). If the set mode number has not been reached (NO), “1” is added to the variation counter (step S 1363), and the chatter 1 background process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation counter has reached the set mode number (YES in step S1362), it is determined whether “morning background effect” is being derived (step S1364). If the “morning background effect” has been derived (YES), the evening background flag is turned on and the counter is set (step S1365), and then the counter in the “morning background effect” is reset (step S1365). S1366). If “morning background effect” has not been derived (NO in step S1364), it is determined whether “evening background effect” is being derived (step S1367). If the “evening background effect” is derived (YES), the night background flag is turned on, the counter is set (step S1368), and then the counter in the “evening background effect” is reset. (Step S1369). If the “evening background effect” has not been derived, that is, if the “night background effect” has been derived (NO in step S1367), the flag relating to the first normal state effect is turned on. (Step S1370), the counter in “Night background effect” is reset (Step S1371).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79, in the chatter 2 background process, it is determined whether the chatter 2 flag is set in step S1314 or step S1343 (step S1381), and if the chatter 2 flag is set (YES) ), Whether the variation counter has reached the set mode number, that is, whether the number of derivations set for each background effect has been reached (step S1382). If the set mode number has not been reached (NO), “1” is added to the variation counter (step S1383), and the chatter 2 background process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation counter has reached the set mode number (YES in step S1382), it is determined whether “morning background effect” is being derived (step S1384). If the “morning background effect” has been derived (YES), the evening background flag is turned on and the counter is set (step S1385), and then the counter in the “morning background effect” is reset (step S1385). S1386). If “morning background effect” has not been derived (NO in step S1384), it is determined whether “evening background effect” is being derived (step S1387). If the “evening background effect” is derived (YES), the night background flag is turned on, the counter is set (step S1388), and then the counter in the “evening background effect” is reset. (Step S1389). If the “evening background effect” is not derived, that is, if the “night background effect” is derived (NO in step S1387), the flag related to the super chatting time effect is turned on ( In step S1390), the counter in “night background effect” is reset (step S1391).

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the lottery result is the third result, that is, as a display mode that can appear in the case of the third advantageous gaming state (big hit), the normal gaming state A normal state effect (a slot effect) showing a high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect) indicating that a probability variation state may have occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c, A high probability expected large effect (talking time effect) indicating that the probability variation state is highly likely to be generated by the three advantageous gaming state control means 933c, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 933c. It has a high probability state effect (super chatting time effect) indicating that On the other hand, when the lottery result is the fourth result, that is, as a display mode that can appear in the case of the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit), the normal state effect (place slot effect) and the high probability expected small effect ( (Katakata Night Chance Production) and High Probability Expectation Production (Talking Time Production). That is, in the fourth advantageous gaming state, although the high probability state effect (the effect indicating that the probability variation state has occurred) cannot appear, the other effects appear in the same manner as the third advantageous game state. It is possible.

  In addition, the high probability state production (super chatting time production) that appears only in the third advantageous gaming state is the stage of high probability expectation small production (katakata night chance production) and high probability expectation large production (chatting time production). It is a production that appears after that, and the transition from the high probability expectation small production to the high probability expectation great production requires the establishment of the first condition (the total of points exceeds a predetermined value) as a requirement, and the high probability expectation large production Since the transition from to the high probability state performance requires the establishment of the second condition (a predetermined number of lotteries are performed), even if the probability variation state occurs in the third advantageous gaming state, The “probability state effect” does not appear immediately. In other words, the third advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state cannot be distinguished for a while from when the predetermined profit is given until the “high probability state effect” appears. . For this reason, even if the fourth advantageous gaming state (small hit) occurs, “may be the third advantageous gaming state (big hit)”, that is, “probability fluctuation state may have entered. ", And the player's expectation can be enhanced. Therefore, the willingness to play is increased and the end of the game due to dissatisfaction can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Also, in any advantageous game state, basically, the transition from the normal state effect (place slot effect) to the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect), the high probability expectation small effect to the high probability expectation large effect Since it shifts to (Talking time production), it becomes possible to raise the expectation for high probability step by step. For this reason, the willingness to game improves and it can prevent as much as possible that a game will be complete | finished on the way. Furthermore, in the case of the third advantageous gaming state, a high-probability state effect indicating “being in a state of changing probability” will eventually appear, which gives the player a sense of security and draws lottery. It is possible to drastically increase the expectation of the user, that is, the expectation that a specific profit will be given.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the high-probability expected small production (katakata night chance production), a privilege other than valuable value is given as the game progresses, and the first condition is established based on this privilege. It is determined whether or not. When the first condition is established, it is possible to cause a high probability expectation large effect (talking time effect) to appear instead of the high probability expectation small effect. Therefore, the player comes to pay attention to whether or not a privilege is granted while visually recognizing the high-probability expected small effect, and thus can enhance the interest of the high-probability expected small effect (katakata night chance effect). In particular, as a privilege, a predetermined point (score) is given for each effect, and when the total of the points reaches a certain value, it is possible to shift from the high probability expected small effect to the high probability expected large effect. Therefore, the player is interested in collecting points and can further increase the willingness to advance the game. In addition, since the higher the total of the points, the more advantageous it becomes, so even if the same type of high-probability expected small effects appear continuously, it is reduced that the content of the effects is bored.

  In addition, even if the total of points reaches a certain value, it does not immediately shift to a high probability expectation large production (talking time production), but a high probability expectation small production (katakata night chance production) of the set number of continuous derivations. It doesn't migrate until everything is executed. For this reason, in the high-probability expected small production, if the total of points reaches a certain value, or if a high score is obtained even if it has not reached the certain value, " It can be recognized that “it has been promised to develop into a production” or “the development has become almost certain”, and the willingness to shift to a high-probability expectation production can be enhanced. That is, it is possible to arouse awareness of “Let's continue playing a little more until the set number of continuous derivations is reached”.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the number of times of continuous derivation of the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect) changes based on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to predict the number of times of continuous derivation. Whether or not the total of points reaches a certain value within the period can be made even more irritating. In particular, when the lottery result is the fourth result, before shifting to the high-probability expected small production, either the first route or the second route is determined by lottery, and the random number for number determination and the determined route (the first route) The number of continuous derivations is determined based on the one route or the second route) and the derivation number distribution table 1228. In the derivation number distribution table 1228, the second route has more continuous derivation times than the first route. Therefore, the number of high-probability expected small effects is greater in patterns that develop into high-probability expected large effects. Therefore, when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production, the feeling of expectation can be gradually increased by the high-probability expectation production, which is in the middle of the production, and the mood when transitioning to a high-probability expectation production can be raised. On the other hand, if it does not shift to the high-probability expectation production, the high-probability expectation production is terminated at a relatively early stage, thereby suppressing a decrease in the willingness to have not developed into a high-probability expectation production. can do.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when shifting to a high probability expectation large production (talking time production), in the final high probability expectation small production (katakata night chance production), the transition destination is set. An advance notice is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize that the high-probability expected small effect has ended and that the transition destination is the high-probability expected large effect. Therefore, a series of performances can be performed smoothly, and the expectation can be greatly expanded with respect to the transition to the high-probability expectation production.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the points may be given not only in the high probability expectation small effect (katakata night chance effect) but also in the normal state effect (normal background effect and place slot effect). . Accordingly, the pleasure of acquiring points in the normal state effect is increased, and the willingness to shift to the high probability expectation small effect can be further enhanced by associating the normal state effect with the high probability expectation small effect. In other words, when points that reach a certain value are given in the normal state performance, “It was promised to develop from a high-probability expected small production to a high-probability expected large production”, or “ It can be recognized as “a certainty”, and the willingness to shift to a high-probability expectation small production can be increased. In other words, from the normal gaming state before the appearance of high-probability expected small effects, it becomes possible to be involved in games played with high-probability expected small effects, and it is possible to further increase interest in these series of effects. become.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since unspecified points are generated based on random numbers, attention to the points is further increased, and sharpness can be given when points are given. In addition, since the larger the total number of points stored, the harder the point value is given, it is possible to suppress the point total from reaching a certain value immediately. That is, the pleasure of collecting points can be continued for a relatively long time. Conversely, when the total point is low, a relatively large point value can be given. For example, if a large point value is given at the beginning of the game, it becomes possible to attract the player's consciousness. In the normal state effect, the first normal state effect (normal background effect) that can appear even if the lottery result does not become the third result or the fourth result, and the third result or the fourth result appear. If the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result, the first normal state effect is changed to the second normal state effect, and then the high It shifts to the probability expectation small effect (or high probability expectation large effect). In the first normal state effect, the point value to be given is determined so as not to reach a constant value even if the point value to be given is added to the total of the stored points. That is, when the value approaches a certain value, the given points are limited to an extremely small point value, or the point value is set to “0” so as not to reach the certain value. Therefore, in the second normal state effect derived after the third result or the fourth result, it becomes possible to reach a certain value for the first time, and when it reaches a certain value, it immediately develops to the next effect. It becomes possible to make it. For this reason, the relationship between the total of accumulated points and the transition condition of the production becomes clear, and the reliability of the points can be improved.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the point value given in the first normal state effect (normal background effect) is “0”, the item image is displayed instead of the point value. ing. For this reason, even if the point value is “0” and the total does not change, the player's mood can be suppressed, and visual interest can be given by the item image. In particular, since multiple types of item images and the expected value for the lottery result of the lottery means are related to each other, it is possible to display the item image corresponding to the expected value, and eliminate the hatred of the item image. be able to.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the slot effect distribution table 1208 in the high probability expectation small effect (place slot effect) is divided into the first area and the second area, and the total of the stored points is A point group that does not reach a certain value even when a given point is added is defined as a first area, and another area, that is, a point group that reaches a certain value is defined as a second area. When the determined point value is included in the second area, the second normal state effect is shifted to the high probability expected large effect without causing the high probability expected small effect to appear. In other words, if you do not reach a certain value even if you add points, you will be transferred to a high-probability expected small effect after giving points, while if you reach a certain value, you will go to a high-probability expected large production I am trying to migrate. Therefore, in the second normal state production, when giving points, it is grasped beforehand whether or not the total of points reaches a certain value, and when it is reached, it is shifted directly to the high probability expectation large production. It is possible to prevent the contradiction between the effects due to the presence of the effects. In particular, when determining the point value in the high-probability expected small effect, the total of points given in the first normal state effect is taken into consideration, and the point value of the second region is selected as the total of points is higher Since the possibility increases, for example, the points accumulated in the first normal state production are compared to “the point value that is given so that the total of points does not reach a certain value in the high probability expectation small production”. Processing that makes the most of it becomes possible.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the high-probability expected production (talking time production) is not caused to appear, the high value is obtained before the first condition is satisfied, that is, before the total of points reaches a certain value. It will return from the small probability expectation production (katakata night chance production) to the first normal state production (normal background production), but in this case all or part of the accumulated points will be erased, so it is in the zero state Alternatively, the first normal state effect is started again from an extremely small state. For example, even if small hits occur continuously, it is possible to prevent the accumulated points from becoming extremely large.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the first normal state effect (normal background effect), it is possible to give points only when the second special symbol changes, and when the first special symbol changes, In order not to be granted, the frequency at which points are given can be reduced, and the sharpness between the cases where points are given and cases where points are not given can be added, and the interest in giving points can be increased. It becomes. Moreover, it becomes possible to visually distinguish the lottery based on the first special symbol and the lottery based on the second special symbol, and it is possible to easily recognize that two types of lotteries are being performed. In particular, since the second start port 332 for starting the variation of the second special symbol is easy to win when entering the specific gaming state, it further enhances the pleasure of entering the specific gaming state. Can do. In addition, since the special effect is performed in the first normal state effect (normal background effect) and only when the operation button 1102 is operated, the points can be given, so the frequency of giving points is more efficient. It can be suppressed to reach a certain value immediately. Furthermore, since the operation of the operation button 1102 is requested, it is possible to actively participate in the production and acquire points as if it were a game, rather than just a passive production just watching. In the first normal state effect, the total of stored points is always displayed. In other words, points can be awarded only when the second special symbol is changing, but the total of points is also displayed when the first special symbol is not awarded. I have to. Therefore, it becomes possible for a player who is always aware of interest in points to start playing a game, and to use information about points as information for selecting a game machine. In other words, it is possible to increase the willingness to play, that is, “I want to play on a game table in which many points have already been accumulated”.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the third advantageous gaming state, the second condition is satisfied when the number of lotteries after the high-probability expected production (talking time production) is derived exceeds a certain number of times. It is determined that it has been performed, and a transition is made to a high probability state effect (super chat time effect). For this reason, the player wishes that the high-probability expectation production lasts long and exceeds a certain number of times. Therefore, even if the high-probability expectation production is a monotonous production, there is no dissatisfaction with the continued production, and it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the lottery. In particular, a high-probability state effect (super chatting time effect) when the number of lottery times predicted to be in the first advantageous game state or the second advantageous game state has not yet reached such an advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause a high-probability state effect to appear at the timing when the player starts to be aware of the end of the game, “If the probability variation state has not occurred”. Therefore, the joy due to the appearance of the high-probability state effect can be further increased, and the game can be suppressed from being ended even though the probability fluctuation state is hidden. Also, in the high-probability expectation production, the background images are switched in order as the game progresses. Can be suppressed. Moreover, since the possibility that the second condition is satisfied, that is, the possibility that a high-probability state effect will appear, becomes higher as the background image changes more slowly, attention can be paid to the background change.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the “third advantageous gaming state” occurs when the gaming state is not at least the probability variation state and is not the short-time gaming state (that is, in the normal time), the short-time gaming state It is made to be in a probability fluctuation state without generating. For this reason, the distinction between the “third advantageous gaming state” and the “fourth advantageous gaming state” can be made more difficult. Further, the display mode that can appear in the case of the fifth advantageous gaming state is a high-probability short-time state effect indicating that a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state are generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 933e. Therefore, when winning the “fifth advantageous gaming state”, it is easily recognized that the state has become a short-time gaming state and a probability fluctuation state, and as a result, the feeling of expectation for the lottery is greatly increased and the player's mood is enhanced. It becomes possible to make it. In other words, the opening / closing operation of the attacker device 335, which is a predetermined profit, becomes more noticeable, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. If a high-probability short-time game does not appear, it becomes clear that it is not the “fifth advantageous game state”, but even in such a case, there is a possibility that it is a “third advantageous game state”. Since it is left behind, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation. Further, when the “third advantageous gaming state” is generated, if the probability variation state has already been reached, the short-time gaming state is generated while the probability variation state is maintained. In other words, after the “third advantageous gaming state” is changed to the probability variation state, before the “first advantageous gaming state” or the “second advantageous gaming state” is given, the “third advantageous game” is again given. When “state” is entered, a short-time gaming state is given, and a high-probability short-time state effect (Tokoro's mega heaven mode effect) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to give a profit more than a predetermined profit (same profit as the fourth advantageous gaming state) as a profit by the “third advantageous gaming state” again, and further increase the expectation for the big hit. Can do. In this case, it is possible to distinguish from the “fourth advantageous game state” because the ease of winning a prize at the second start opening 332 increases and a specific effect appears. Since the control is limited to the case where the “third advantageous gaming state” is continuously generated, even if the high-probability time-short state effect does not appear, the player's motivation is not reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game area 37 is provided with a first start opening 330 that can always win a prize and a second start opening 332 that allows a game ball to win when opened. When a game ball wins one of the first start port 330 and the second start port 332, the first special symbol display 390a and the second special symbol display 390a corresponding to the start ports 64 and 65 are provided. When a predetermined effect is derived in the special symbol display 390b and further in the effect display device 217, and a game ball wins both the start openings 64 and 65, two types of effects are derived in a predetermined order. . In addition, when it is determined that a specific gaming state such as a gaming state after the “probability variation jackpot” is finished, the open / close state of the second start port 332 is controlled, and the winning of the game ball is extremely difficult. It changes to a very easy state. For this reason, when it becomes a specific gaming state, it becomes easy to win a game ball with respect to the second starting port 332, and the opportunity for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery to be performed in parallel increases. As a result, the advantage in a specific gaming state can be greatly improved.

  A gaming machine is also known that increases the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls when a specific gaming state is entered in order to frequently perform lottery in a specific gaming state. However, even if the upper limit value of the number of held balls is increased in this way, in a gaming machine in which it is difficult to win a game ball at the starting port, the frequency of the lottery cannot be increased, and the player is satisfied. I can't. On the other hand, in this example, when a specific gaming state is reached, the number of lottery means is substantially increased, and the effect display is performed in a predetermined order in parallel. In addition, it is possible to greatly increase the feeling of expectation for the lottery.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the maximum number of rounds is set to “15” in the big hit that is given a specific profit, whereas in the big hit or small hit that is given a predetermined profit, Since the number of rounds is set to “2” and the opening time is extremely short, the advantage between a specific profit and a predetermined profit can be clearly differentiated.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second start port 332 is changed from a state of hardly opening to a state of frequently opening by changing the winning probability of the normal winning lottery. The ease of winning a game ball at the mouth 332 can be easily changed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the first decorative symbol 991 and the second decorative symbol 992, the common decorative symbol row 993 is also displayed, so that the first decorative symbol 991 or the second decorative symbol 992 It is possible to easily grasp which lottery is being performed, and it is possible to recognize the production contents and the lottery result by the change and stop of the common decorative symbol sequence 993. In other words, even if the size of the first decorative design 991 and the second decorative design 992 is relatively small, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of fluctuation, and accordingly, the display area of the common decorative design sequence 993 is increased, A powerful effect in which the shared decorative design row 993 is displayed on the entire screen is possible.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the various tables in the first big hit lottery and the various tables in the second big hit lottery are shown as separate tables. However, the same table may be shared. However, by constructing a separate table for each lottery as in the above embodiment, not only the lottery frequency is increased, but also lotteries with different contents are added. Can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first start port 330 is constituted by a pocket-type winning port having a fixed opening degree. However, as with the second start port 332, a pair of left and right movable pieces are provided. The electric opening and closing winning device may be configured to change the ease of winning a prize to the first start port 330 based on the gaming state. However, if the opening degree of the first start port 330 is always kept constant as in the present example, it is possible to enhance the gameability by combining different types of start ports.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when a specific gaming state is reached, the winning probability in the normal lottery, that is, the rate at which the movable piece 331 is released is increased, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display 928 is shortened, whereby the second start opening Although an example of increasing the ease of winning a prize at 332 has been shown, only the winning probability in the normal lottery may be increased without changing the variation time.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed according to the winning order of the game balls with respect to the first starting port 330 or the second starting port 332.
The first special symbol change may be executed before the second special symbol change. However, if it is made to change in order of winning as in this example, even if there is a difference in the ease of winning with respect to the two start ports 330 and 332, it will be digested in order in proportion to the ease of winning. For example, it is possible to suppress the monotonous effect due to the fact that only one of the processes is left and a display mode corresponding to the process is continuously derived.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the one that causes the peripheral board 811 to execute the decoration symbol sequence fluctuation and the development effect, that is, the one that controls the effect display based on the command transmitted from the main control board 94 is shown. However, all effect processing may be performed on the main control board 94. However, if the rendering process is shared as in the above embodiment, the processing burden on the main control board 94 can be reduced and these processes can be further diversified.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied.

It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a back perspective view of a game board. It is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of a game board having a game area. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally backward. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main control board box, a sub control board box and the like in FIG. 12 are removed. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board and shows from diagonally forward. It is a front view of a former main character. It is a perspective view which shows the front main character from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the front main character from diagonally backward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the front main character and shows from diagonally forward. It is an enlarged front view which expands and shows the stage vicinity of a front main character. It is a perspective view which shows a left and right movable decoration body and a decoration body drive unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows a left movable decoration body from diagonally backward, (B) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a left movable decoration body and shows from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which shows a right movable decoration body from diagonally backward, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a right movable decoration body and shows from diagonally forward. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the left movable decorative body drive unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the right movable decorative body drive unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the left and right movable decorations. It is a perspective view which shows the main winning a prize mouth unit, the game area decoration body, and the discharge | emission guidance member from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the principal part of the starting port in a main winning opening unit, (B) is the side view. (A) is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the attacker apparatus in a main winning opening unit, (B) is the side view. It is a perspective view which shows a main winning opening unit from diagonally backward lower side. It is a back perspective view which shows the decoration body in a game area | region from diagonally backward. It is sectional drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball | bowl in the main winning a prize port unit, a game area decoration, and a discharge guide member. It is a perspective view which shows a back main character from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a rear main character and shows from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a rear main character and shows from diagonally backward. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st movable accessory unit in a back main actor from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a 1st movable accessory unit for every main part, and shows from diagonally forward. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the 1st movable combination in a 1st movable combination unit, and shows from diagonally forward, (B) is an enlarged front view which shows the lens part in a 1st movable combination. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st movable combination drive unit in a 1st movable combination unit from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st movable accessory drive unit from diagonally backward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a 1st movable accessory drive unit for every principal part. It is a disassembled perspective view further disassembled and shown than FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the 1st raising / lowering member in a 1st movable accessory drive unit, (B) is an exploded perspective view of a 1st raising / lowering member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 1st movable accessory solenoid in a 1st raising / lowering member, and a rotation transmission member. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd movable decoration body unit in a back main decoration body from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a 2nd movable decoration body unit for every principal part, and shows from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the 2nd movable decoration body in a 2nd movable decoration body unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd movable decoration body drive unit in a 2nd movable decoration body unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a 2nd movable decoration body drive unit for every main part. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows further than FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the 2nd raising / lowering member in a 2nd movable decoration body drive unit, (B) is an exploded perspective view of a 2nd raising / lowering member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd movable decoration body solenoid in a 2nd raising / lowering member, and a link mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows a movable decoration body unit cover from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of a movable decoration body unit cover. It is a part of block diagram which shows a control structure roughly. It is another part of the block diagram which shows a control structure schematically. It is a front view of the game field which shows the state where the movable decoration object in the front main character turned to the approximately perpendicular direction. FIG. 56 is a front view of a game area showing a state in which the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body of the rear decorative body are further moved from the state of FIG. 55. It is a front view of the game field showing the state where the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body of the rear decorative body are moved. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate, and the process at the time of a power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern setting process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fluctuation | variation in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric utility jackpot control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory small hit control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the 16ms steady process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in a 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process in a 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the background selection process in a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the special background process in a background selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the Katakata 1A background process in a special background process. It is a flowchart which shows Katakata 1B (2) background processing in special background processing. It is a flowchart which shows the talk 1 background process in a special background process. It is a flowchart which shows the talk 2 background process in a special background process. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 2nd lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding an advantageous game state. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | presentation display control and decoration design fluctuation | variation control in an electrical decoration control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is explanatory drawing which shows a winning probability, distribution, state transition, etc. in the big hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the winning probability in the normal lottery, the opening time of a 2nd start port, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a specific production | presentation and the display of a pending | holding state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state transition of an effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the background image in a big hit state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the background image in a small hit state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an item distribution table and an item conversion table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the Katakata selection table at the time of the 4th hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a slot production | presentation distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a continuous derivation number table, an accessory Katakata notice effect distribution table, and an Katakata final distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fall point distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode number distribution table in a talk production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode number distribution table in a talk production. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a 1st normal state effect. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a 2nd normal state effect. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a high probability expectation small production. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure with respect to a high probability expectation large production. It is a specific production example in the first normal state production. It is a specific production example in the first normal state production. It is an example of a specific effect in the second normal state effect. It is an example of a specific effect in the second normal state effect. It is a specific example of production in a high probability expectation small production. It is a specific example of production in a high probability expectation small production. It is a specific example of production in a high probability expectation production. It is a specific production example in a high probability state production.

Explanation of symbols

1 Pachinko machine 92 Sub control board 94 Main control board 130 Launcher unit (launcher)
217 Production Display Device 330 First Start Port (Start Port)
332 Second start port (start port)
335 Attacker device (opening / closing prize winning device)
358 Second start port sensor (second winning state detection means)
390 Special symbol display 390a First special symbol display 390b Second special symbol display 416 First start port sensor (first winning state detection means)
810 Main board (main control means)
811 Peripheral board (sub control means)
911a First hit determination table 911b Second hit determination table 912a First hit symbol table 912b Second hit symbol table 913a First hit time variation time setting table 913b Second hit time variation time setting table 914a First Fluctuation time setting table 914b for one offset Second variable time setting table 916a for one offside detection First random number extracting means for determining hit (lottery means, first lottery means)
916b Second hit determination random number extraction means (lottery means, second lottery means)
917a First random number random number extracting means 917b Second random random number extracting means 918a First variation time random number extracting means (lottery means, first lottery means)
918b Second fluctuation time random number extraction means (lottery means, second lottery means)
923 Game state determination means 925 Normal success / failure determination means 929 Release control means 930a First success / failure determination means (lottery means, first lottery means)
930b Second success / failure determination means (lottery means, second lottery means)
931a First stop symbol determining means (display mode determining means, first display mode determining means)
931b Second stop symbol determining means (display mode determining means, second display mode determining means)
932a First variation time determining means (display mode determining means, first display mode determining means)
932b Second variation time determining means (display mode determining means, second display mode determining means)
933a First advantageous gaming state control means 933b Second advantageous gaming state control means 933c Third advantageous gaming state control means 933d Fourth advantageous gaming state control means 933e Fifth advantageous gaming state control means 934 Special symbol variation control means (first special Symbol variation control means, second special symbol variation control means)
935 Command transmission means 958a First effect mode determination means (display control means)
958b Second effect mode determining means (display control means)
960 decoration symbol sequence fluctuation display means 964 jackpot display means 975a first effect display control means (display control means, common effect execution means, third unique effect execution means)
975b second effect display control means (display control means, common effect execution means, third specific effect execution means)
976a First decorative symbol variation control means 976b Second decorative symbol variation control means 981 Specific profit giving means 982 Predetermined profit giving means 993 Decorative symbol row 995 Winning state implied means 1001 Normal background effect (first normal state effect)
1002 slot effect (second normal condition effect)
1003 Katakata night chance production (high probability expectation small production)
1004 Talking time production (high probability expectation production)
1005 Super chatting time production (high probability state production)
1223 Transition destination notice display means 1224 Route determination means 1225 Route distribution table 1227 Katata Kata derivation number setting means (Derivation number setting means)
1228 Derived number distribution table 1229 Number determination random number extracting means 1240 Number determining means 1302 Katakata point generating means (point giving means)
1303 Point distribution table 1304 Random number extraction means for point determination 1305 Point determination means 1322 Second effect transition control means (effect transition postponement means)
1323 Point elimination means 1324 Remaining point distribution table 1325 Remaining point determination random number extraction means 1326 Remaining point determination means

Claims (1)

An effect display means for displaying an effect associated with the game;
A start port that is placed in the game area and where a game medium can be won;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game medium has been won at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the detection of the game medium by the winning state detection means;
A display control means for specifying a display mode related to the lottery based on the lottery result of the lottery unit, and for deriving the display mode to the effect display unit;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows the game medium to be awarded by changing from a closed state to an open state;
The opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a first predetermined time that allows several game media to barely win, and the opening / closing prize-winning device is opened and closed at least once. A predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to
The opening and closing time of the open / close prize winning device is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of game media to win with a margin, and the opening and closing operation of the open / close prize winning device is given the predetermined profit. Specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to the player by performing more than the number of opening and closing operations in the case of,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and the probability that at least the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is higher than usual. A first advantageous gaming state control means for imparting an advantageous gaming state with a probability variation state set to a higher value,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result, the specific profit is given to the player by the specific profit granting means, and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state that does not cause the probability fluctuation state is given. Two advantageous gaming state control means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the third result, the third advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit granting means, and thereafter the advantageous gaming state is set to the probability variation state Control means;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the fourth result, the predetermined profit granting means gives the player the predetermined profit, but the fourth advantageous game state control means does not cause an advantageous gaming state. Equipped,
The display control means includes
As the common display mode that can appear when the lottery result is the third result or the fourth result,
Normal state effect indicating that the game state is normal,
A high-probability expected small effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, and that a privilege can be given as the game progresses,
And an effect that can appear when at least the privilege given in the high-probability expected small effect satisfies a predetermined first condition, and a probability variation state is generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means. A common performance execution means capable of performing a high probability expectation production that indicates that there is a high possibility that
As the display mode unique to the third advantageous gaming state that can appear when the lottery result is the third result and not the fourth result,
A high-probability state effect that is an effect that can appear when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the high-probability expected large effect, and that indicates that a probability variation state has occurred by the third advantageous gaming state control means, And a third specific production execution means capable of executing
The display control means is for the high probability expectation small effect,
Point giving means for giving a predetermined production point as the privilege;
Derivation number setting means for setting the continuation derivation number of the high probability expectation small effect,
First condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied when the total of the production points given by the point giving means reaches a certain value;
Even if it is determined by the first condition determination means that the first condition is satisfied, the high probability until the number of executions of the high probability expectation small effect reaches the continuous derivation number set by the derivation number setting means. A game machine comprising: an effect transition postponing means for postponing the transition to a probabilistic expectation production.

Images